Mechanical engineering and materials Books

1621 products


  • Ceramics for Environmental and Energy

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Ceramics for Environmental and Energy

    3 in stock

    Book SynopsisA collection of papers from the below symposia held during the 10th Pacific Rim Conference on Ceramic and Glass Technology (PacRim10), June 2-7, 2013, in Coronado, California 2012: Solid Oxide Fuel Cells and Hydrogen Technology Direct Thermal to Electrical Energy Conversion Materials and Applications Photovoltaic Materials and Technologies Ceramics for Next Generation Nuclear Energy Advances in Photocatalytic Materials for Energy and Environmental Applications Ceramics Enabling Environmental Protection: Clean Air and Water Advanced Materials and Technologies for Electrochemical Energy Storage Systems Glasses and Ceramics for Nuclear and Hazardous Waste Treatment Table of ContentsPreface ix Recent Research Activities for Future Challenges in Global Energy and Environment in Toyota Central R&D Labs., Inc. (TCRDL) 1Tomoyoshi Motohiro SOLID OXIDE FUEL CELLS AND HYDROGEN TECHNOLOGY Structural and Electrical Characterization of PrxCe0.95-xGd0.05O2.s (0.15 less than/equal to x less than/equal to 0.40) as Cathode Materials for Low Temperature SOFC 13Rajalekshmi Chockalingam, Suddhasatwa Basu, and Ashok Kumar Ganguli Solid Oxide Metal-Air Batteries for Advanced Energy Storage 25Xuan Zhao, Yunhui Gong, Xue Li, Nansheng Xu, and Kevin Huang Fabrication of Ce02/Al Multilayer Thin Films and the Thermal Behavior 33Shumpei Kurokawa, Takashi Hashizume, Masateru Nose, and Atsushi Saiki DIRECT THERMAL TO ELECTRICAL ENERGY CONVERSION MATERIALS AND APPLICATIONS Reduced Strontium Titanate Thermoelectric Materials 45Lisa A. Moore and Charlene M. Smith PHOTOVOLTAIC MATERIALS AND TECHNOLOGIES Densification and Properties of Fluorine Doped Tin Oxide (FTO) Ceramics by Spark Plasma Sintering 59Meijuan Li, Kun Xiang, Qiang Shen, and Lianmeng Zhang Interfacial Character and Electronic Passivation in Amorphous Thin-Film Alumina for Si Photovoltaics 65L.R. Hubbard, J.B. Kana-Kana, and B.G. Potter, Jr. CERAMICS FOR NEXT GENERATION NUCLEAR ENERGY SiC/SiC Fuel Cladding by NITE Process for Innovative LWR Pre-Composite Ribbon Design and Fabrication 79Yuuki Asakura, Daisuke Hayasaka, Joon-Soo Park, Hirotatsu Kishimoto, and Akira Kohyama SiC/SiC Fuel Cladding by NITE Process for Innovative Light Water Reactor - Compatibility with High Temperature Pressurized Water 85C. Kanda, Y. Kanda, H. Kishimoto, and A. Kohyama SiC/SiC Fuel Cladding by NITE Process for Innovative LWR-Concept and Process Development of Fuel Pin Assembly Technologies 93Hirotatsu Kishimoto, Tamaki Shibayama, Yuuki Asakura, Daisuke Hayasaka, Yutaka Kohno, and Akira Kohyama "INSPIRE" Project for R&D of SiC/SiC Fuel Cladding by NITE Method 99Akira Kohyama SiC/SiC Fuel Cladding by NITE Process for Innovative LWR-Cladding Forming Process Development 109Naofumi Nakazato, Hirotatsu Kishimoto, Yutaka Kohno, and Akira Kohyama ADVANCES IN PHOTOCATALYTIC MATERIALS FOR ENERGY AND ENVIRONMENTAL APPLICATIONS Preparation of Brookite-Type Titanium Oxide Nanocrystal by Hydrothermal Synthesis 119S. Kitahara, T. Hashizume, and A. Saiki Effect of Atmosphere on Crystallisation Kinetics and Phase Relations in Electrospun Ti02 Nanofibres 125H. Albetran, H. Haroosh, Y. Dong, B. H. O'Connor, and I. M. Low Electronic and Optical Properties of Nitrogen-Doped Layered Manganese Oxides 135Giacomo Giorgi and Koichi Yamashita CERAMICS ENABLING ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION: CLEAN AIR AND WATER Understanding the Effect of Dynamic Feed Conditions on Water Recovery from IC Engine Exhaust by Capillary Condensation with Inorganic Membranes 143Melanie Moses DeBusk, Brian Bischoff, James Hunter, James Klett, Eric Nafziger, and Stuart Daw Reliability of Ceramic Membranes of BSCF for Oxygen Separation in a Pilot Membrane Reactor 153E. M. Pfaff, M. Oezel, A. Eser, and A. Bezold ADVANCED MATERIALS AND TECHNOLOGIES FOR ELECTROCHEMICAL ENERGY STORAGE SYSTEMS In Situ Experimentation with Batteries using Neutron and Synchrotron X-Ray Diffraction 167Neeraj Sharma Electrochemical Performance of LiNi1/3Co1/3Mn1/302 Lithium Polymer Battery Based on PVDF-HFP/m-SBA15 Composite Polymer Membranes 181Chun-Chen Yang and Zuo-Yu Lian GLASSES AND CERAMICS FOR NUCLEAR AND HAZARDOUS WASTE TREATMENT Borosilicate Glass Foams from Glass Packaging Residues 205R. K.Chinnam, Silvia Molinaro, Enrico Bernardo, and Aldo R. Boccaccini The Durability of Simulated UK High Level Waste Glass Compositions Based on Recent Vitrification Campaigns 211Mike T. Harrison and Carl J. Steele Scaled Melter Testing of Noble Metals Behavior with Japanese HLW Streams 225Keith S. Matlack, Hao Gan, Ian L. Pegg, Innocent Joseph, Bradley W. Bowan, Yoshiyuki Miura, Norio Kanehira, Eiji Ochi, Tamotsu Ebisawa, Atsushi Yamazaki, Toshiro Oniki, and Yoshihiro Endo Suppression of Yellow Phase Formation during Japanese HLW Vitrification 237Hao Gan, Keith S. Matlack, Ian L. Pegg, Innocent Joseph, Bradley W. Bowan, Yoshiyuki Miura, Norio Kanehira, Eiji Ochi, Toshiro Oniki, and Yoshihiro Endo Cold Crucible Vitrification of Hanford HLW Surrogates in Aluminum-Iron-Phosphate Glass 251S. V. Stefanovsky, S. Y. Shvetsov, V. V. Gorbunov, A. V. Lekontsev, A. V. Efimov, I. A. Knyazev, O. I. Stefanovsky, M. S. Zen'kovskaya, and J. A. Roach Hafnium and Samarium Speciation in Vitrified Radioactive Incinerator Slag 265G. A. Malinina, S. V. Stefanovsky, A. A. Shiryaev, and Y. V. Zubavichus Author Index 273

    3 in stock

    £104.36

  • Advances in Multifunctional Materials and Systems

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Advances in Multifunctional Materials and Systems

    7 in stock

    Book SynopsisContains a collection of papers from the below symposia held during the 10th Pacific Rim Conference on Ceramic and Glass Technology (PacRim10), June 2-7,2013, in Coronado, California 2012: Advances in Electroceramics Microwave Materials and Their Applications Oxide Materials for Nonvolatile Memory Technology and ApplicationsTable of ContentsPreface vii ADVANCES IN ELECTROCERAMICS Pyroelectric Performances of Relaxor-Based Ferroelectric Single Crystals and their Applications in Infrared Detectors 3 Long Li, Haosu Luo, Xiangyong Zhao, Xiaobing Li, Bo Ren, Qing Xu, and Wenning Di Formation of Tough Foundation Layer for Electrical Plating on Insulator using Aerosol Deposition Method of Cu-Al203 Mixed Powder 17 Naoki Seto, Shingo Hirose, Hiroki Tsuda and Jun Akedo Formation and Electromagnetic Properties of 0.1 BTO/0.9NZFO Ceramic Composite with High Density Prepared by Three-Step Sintering Method 23 Bin Xiao, Juncong Wang, Ning Ma, and Piyi Du MICROWAVE MATERIALS AND THEIR APPLICATIONS Thin Glass Characterization in the Radio Frequency Range 37 Alfred Ebberg, Jürgen Meggers, Kai Rathjen, Gerhard Fotheringham, Ivan Ndip, Florian Ohnimus, Christian Tschoban, Isa Pieper, Andreas Kilian, Sebastian Methfessel, Martin Letz, and Ulrich Fotheringham Formation of Silver Nano Particles in Percolative Ag-PbTi03 Composite Dielectric Thin Film 51 Tao Hu, Zongrong Wang, Liwen Tang, Ning Ma, and Piyi Du Software for Calculating Permittivity of Resonators: HakCol & ErCalc 65 Rick Ubic Effects of MgO Additive on Structural, Dielectric Properties and Breakdown Strength of Mg2Ti04 Ceramics Doped with ZnO-B203 Glass 17 Xiaohong Wang, Mengjie Wang, Zhaoqiang Li, and Wenzhong Lu Design of Microwave Dielectrics Based on Crystallography 87 Hitoshi Ohsato OXIDE MATERIALS FOR NONVOLATILE MEMORY TECHNOLOGY AND APPLICATIONS Stable Resistive Switching Characteristics of Al203 Layers Inserted in Hf02 Based RRAM Devices 103 Chun-Yang Huang, Jheng-Hong Jieng, and Tseung-Yuen Tseng Improvement of Resistive Switching Properties of Ti/Zr02/Pt with Embedded Germanium 111 Chun-An Lin, Debashis Panda, and Tseung-Yuen Tseng Nonvolatile Memories Using Single Electron Tunneling Effects in Si Quantum Dots Inside Tunnel Silicon Oxide 117 Ryuji Ohba Resistive Switching and Rectification Characteristics with CoO/Zr02 Double Layers 123 Tsung-Ling Tsai, Jia-Woei Wu, and Tseng-Yuen Tseng Research Of Nano-Scaled Transition Metal Oxide Resistive Non-Volatile Memory (R-RAM) 129 ChiaHua Ho, Cho-Lun Hsu, Chun-Chi Chen, Ming-Taou Lee, Hsin-Hau Huang, Kai-Shin Li, Lu-Mei Lu, Tung-Yen Lai, Wen-Cheng Chiu, Bo-Wei Wu, MeiYi Li, Min-Cheng Chen, Cheng-San Wu, Yi-Ping Hsieh, and Fu-Liang Yang Author Index 137

    7 in stock

    £100.76

  • Advances in Bioceramics and Biotechnologies II

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Advances in Bioceramics and Biotechnologies II

    3 in stock

    Book SynopsisA collection of papers from the below symposia held during the 10th Pacific Rim Conference on Ceramic and Glass Technology (PacRim10), June 2-7, 2013, in Coronado, California 2012: Advances in Biomineralized Ceramics, Bioceramics, and Bioinspired Designs Nanostructured Bioceramics and Ceramics for Biomedical ApplicationsTable of ContentsPreface ix ADVANCES IN BIOMINERALIZED CERAMICS, BIOCERAMICS, AND BIOINSPIRED DESIGN Vapor Deposition Polymerization as an Alternative Method to Enhance the Mechanical Properties of Bio-Inspired Scaffolds 3Pei Chun Chou, Michael M. Porter, Joanna McKittrick, and Po-Yu Chen The Natural Process of Biomineralization and In-Vitro Remineralization of Dentin Lesions 13Stefan Habelitz, Tiffany Hsu, Paul Hsiao, Kuniko Saeki, Yung-Ching Chien, Sally J. Marshall, and Grayson W. Marshall Synthesis of Highly Branched Zinc Oxide Nanowires 25Wenting Hou, Louis Lancaster, Dongsheng Li, Ana Bowlus, and David Kisailus A Comparison on the Structural and Mechanical Properties of Untreated and Deproteinized Nacre 37Maria I. Lopez, Po-Yu Chen, Joanna McKittrick, and Marc A. Meyers Reinforcing Structures in Avian Wing Bones 47E. Novitskaya, M.S. Ribero Vairo, J. Kiang, M.A. Meyers, and J. McKittrick Structural Differences between Alligator Pipehorse and Bay Pipefish Tails 57Zherrina Manilay, Vanessa Nguyen, Ekaterina Novitskaya, Michael Porter, Ana Bertha Castro-Cesena, and Joanna McKittrick Initial Investigations in Applying a PILP-Mineralization System to Calcium Oxalate Formation using Vapor Diffusion 65Douglas E. Rodriguez, Saeed R. Khan, and Laurie B. Gower Utilizing Kaolinite and Amorphous Calcium Carbonate Precursors to Synthesize Oriented Aragonitic Structures 75Jong Seto Use of Biomineralization Media in Biomimetic Synthesis of Hard Tissue Substitutes 91A. Cuneyt Tas Structural Characterization and Compressive Behavior of the Boxfish Horn 105Wen Yang, Vanessa Nguyen, Michael M. Porter, Marc A. Meyers, and Joanna McKittrick Comparative Evaluation of Crystallization Behavior, Micro Structure Properties and Biocompatibility of Fluorapatite-Mullite Glass-Ceramics 113S. Mollazadeh, A. Youssefi, B. Eftekhari Yekta, J. Javadpour, T.S. Jafarzadeh, M. Mehrju, and M. A. Shokrgozar NANOSTRUCTURED BIOCERAMICS AND CERAMICS FOR BIOMEDICAL APPLICATIONS Size Control of Magnetite Nanoparticles and their Surface Modification for Hyperthermia Application 127Eun-Hee Lee and Chang-Yeoul Kim Design, Synthesis, and Evaluation of Polydopamine-Laced Gelatinous Hydroxyapatite Nanocomposites for Orthopedic Applications 135Ching-Chang Ko, Zhengyan Wang, Henry Tseng, Dong Joon Lee, and Camille Guez Application of Scratch Hardness Tests for Evaluation of Partially Sintered Zirconia CAD/CAM Blocks for All-Ceramic Prosthesis 149Da-Jeong Lee, Seung-Won Seo, Hyung-Jun Yoon, Hye-Lee Kim, Jung-Suk Han, and Dae-Joon Kim Functionalized Alkoxysilane Mediated Synthesis of Nano-Materials and their Application 155P. C. Pandey and Ashish K. Pandey Development of Bioactive Glass Scaffolds for Structural Bone Repair 167Mohamed N. Rahaman, Xin Liu, and B. Sonny Bal Fabrication, Characterization and In-Vitro Evaluation of Apatite-Based Microbeads for Bone Implant Science 179J. Feng, M. Chong, J. Chan, Z.Y. Zhang, S.H. Teoh, and E.S. Thian A Functionalized Nanoporous Alumina Membrane Electrochemical Sensor for DNA Detection with Gold Nanoparticle Amplification 191Weiwei Ye and Mo Yang Author Index 199

    3 in stock

    £104.36

  • Innovative Processing and Manufacturing of

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Innovative Processing and Manufacturing of

    7 in stock

    Book SynopsisContains collection of papers from the below symposia held during the 10th Pacific Rim Conference on Ceramic and Glass Technology (PacRim10), June 2-7, 2013, in Coronado, California 2012: Novel, Green, and Strategic Processing and Manufacturing Technologies Polymer Derived Ceramics and Composites Advanced Powder Processing and Manufacturing Technologies Synthesis and Processing of Materials Using Electric Fields/Currents Table of ContentsPreface ix NOVEL, GREEN, AND STRATEGIC PROCESSING AND MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGIES Optimized Shaping Process for Transparent Spinel Ceramic 3 Alfred Kaiser, Thomas Hutzler, Andreas Krell, and Robert Kremer Thermal Diffusion Coatings for Wear-Resistant Components for Oil and Gas Industry 13 E. Medvedovski, F.A. Chinski, and J. Stewart POLYMER DERIVED CERAMICS AND COMPOSITES Polymer-Derived Ceramics for Development of Ultra-High Temperature Composites 33 C. J. Leslie, H. J. Kim, H. Chen, K. M. Walker, E. E. Boakye, C. Chen, C. M. Carney, M. K. Cinibulk, and M.-Y. Chen Siliconboronoxycarbide (SIBOC) Foam from Methyl Borosiloxane 47 Sreejith Krishnan, Tobias Fey, and Peter Greil Synthesis of a Porous SiC Material from Poiycarbosilane by Direct Foaming and Radiation Curing 61 Akira Idesaki, Masaki Sugimoto, and Masahito Yoshikawa Fabrication of SiOC/C Coatings on Stainless Steel using Poly(Phenyl Carbosilane) and their Anti-Corrosion Properties 71 Yoon Joo Lee, Jong II Kim, Soo Ryong Kim, Woo Teck Kwon, Dong-Geun Shin, and Yonghee Kim Photo Luminescent Properties of Polymer Derived Ceramics at Near Stoichiometric Si02-xSiC-y(H) Compositions 79 Masaki Narisawa and Akihiro Iwase, Seiji Watase and Kimihiro Matsukawa, and Taketoshi Kawai Synthesis of Hierarchical Porous SiCO Monoliths from Preceramic Polymer Impregnated with Porous Templates 85 Xuehua Yan, Jianmei Pan, Xiaonong Cheng, Chenghua Zhang, and Guifang Xu ADVANCED POWDER PROCESSING AND MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGIES Solid Reaction Mechanism of Li2C03 and FePOyC Powder 95 Takashi Hashizume, Atsushi Saiki, and Kiyoshi Terayama Development of New Synthesis Route of Lanthanum Germanate Oxyapatite from Homogeneous Aqueous Solution 103 Shouta Kitajima, Kiyoshi Kobayashi, Toru Higuchi, and Yoshio Sakka Magnetic Orientation of Bismuth Nano-Particles in a Transparent Medium 109 Naoyuki Kitamura, Kohki Takahashi, Iwao Mogi, Satoshi Awaji, and Kazuo Watanabe Control of Dispersion and Agglomeration of CNTS for their Networking—Mechanical and Electrical Properties of CNT/Alumina Composites 117 Mitsuaki Matsuoka, Junichi Tatami, and Toru Wakihara Synthesis and Microstructure Development in Yttria-Magnesia Ceramics for Infrared Transparency 121 J. A. Miller and I. E. Reimanis Fabrication of Flake-Like Boehmite/Ceria or Zinc Oxide Composites for UV Shield Coating 131 Seizo Obata, Susumu Kawai, Michiyuki Yoshida, Osamu Sakurada, and Kenji Kido Thermal Degradation Control Study of Carbon Fiber/Polyamide 6 Composite using Hexagonal Boron Nitride Powder 141 Daisuke Shimamoto, Yusuke Imai, and Yuji Hotta Sol-Gel Auto-Combustion Synthesis of Co-Doped ZnO Diluted Magnetic Semiconductor Nanopowders 149 Chuanbin Wang, Xuan Zhou, Fei Chen, Qiang Shen, and Lianmeng Zhang SYNTHESIS AND PROCESSING OF MATERIALS USING ELECTRIC FIELDS/CURRENTS Advanced Usage of SPS Technology for Producing Innovative Materials 159 Foad Naimi, Ludivine Minier, Cedric Morin, Sophie Le Gallet, and Frederic Bernard Fabrication of Transparent MgAI204 Spinel by Optimizing Loading Schedule during Spark-Plasma-Sintering 173 Koji Morita, Byung-Nam Kim, Hidehiro Yoshida, Yoshio Sakka, and Keijiro Hiraga Properties of WCCo/Diamond Composites Produced by PPS Method Intended for Drill Bits for Machining of Building Stones 181 Marcin Rosinski, Joanna Wachowicz, Tomasz Plocinski, Tomasz Truszkowski, and Andrzej Michalski Surface Morphology of YSZ Thin Films Deposited from a Precursor Solution under the Electrical Fields 193 Atsushi Saiki, Kento Hamada, and Takashi Hashizume Author Index 201

    7 in stock

    £104.36

  • Advanced Materials for Agriculture Food and

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Advanced Materials for Agriculture Food and

    15 in stock

    Book Synopsis The book focuses on the role of advanced materials in the food, water and environmental applications. The monitoring of harmful organisms and toxicants in water, food and beverages is mainly discussed in the respective chapters. The senior contributors write on the following topics: Layered double hydroxides and environment Corrosion resistance of aluminium alloys of silanes New generation material for the removal of arsenic from water Prediction and optimization of heavy clay products quality Enhancement of physical and mechanical properties of fiber Environment friendly acrylates latices Nanoparticles for trace analysis of toxins Recent development on gold nanomaterial as catalyst Nanosized metal oxide based adsorbents for heavy metal removal Phytosynthesized transition metal nanoparticles- novel functional agents for textiles Kinetics and equilibrium modeling MagTable of ContentsPreface xv Part 1: Fundamental Methodologies 1 1 Layered Double Hydroxides and the Environment: An Overview 3 Amita Jaiswal, Ravindra Kumar Gautam and Mahesh Chandra Chattopadhyaya 1.1 Introduction 4 1.2 Structure of Layered Double Hydroxides 4 1.3 Properties of Layered Double Hydroxides 6 1.4 Synthesis of Layered Double Hydroxides 7 1.5 Characterization of Layered Double Hydroxides 11 1.6 Applications of Layered Double Hydroxides 13 1.7 Conclusions 19 Acknowledgements 19 References 20 2 Improvement of the Corrosion Resistance of Aluminium Alloys Applying Different Types of Silanes 27 Anca-Iulia Stoica, Norica Carmen Godja, Andje Stankovic, Matthias Polzler, Erich Kny and Christoph Kleber 2.1 Introduction 28 2.2 Silanes for Surface Treatment 31 2.3 Materials, Methods and Experimentals 40 2.4 Surface Analytics 42 2.5 Results and Discussion 43 2.6 Conclusions 56 Acknowledgements 57 References 57 3 New Generation Material for the Removal of Arsenic from Water 61 Dinesh Kumar and Vaishali Tomar 3.1 Introduction 62 3.2 Arsenic Desorption/Sorbent Regeneration 76 3.3 Conclusions 78 Acknowledgement 79 References 79 4 Prediction and Optimization of Heavy Clay Products Quality 87 Milica Arsenovic, Lato Pezo, Lidija Mancic and Zagorka Radojevic 4.1 Introduction 87 4.2 Materials and Methods 89 4.3 Results and Discussions 94 4.4 Conclusions 117 Acknowledgement 118 References 118 5 Enhancement of Physical and Mechanical Properties of Sugar Palm Fiber via Vacuum Resin Impregnation 121 M.R. Ishak, Z. Leman, S.M. Sapuan, M.Z.A. Rahman and U.M.K. Anwar 5.1 Introduction 122 5.2 Experimental 123 5.3 Results and Discussion 125 5.4 Conclusions 138 Acknowledgments 139 References 139 6 Environmentally-Friendly Acrylates-Based Polymer Latices 145 Sweta Shukla and J.S.P. Rai 6.1 Introduction 146 6.2 Polymerization Techniques 154 References 170 Part 2: Inventive Nanotechnology 177 7 Nanoparticles for Trace Analysis of Toxins: Present and Future Scenario 179 Anupreet Kaur and Shivender Singh Saini 7.1 Introduction 179 7.2 Nanoremediation Using TiO2 Nanoparticles 180 7.3 Gold Nanoparticles for Nanoremediation 183 7.4 Zero-Valent Iron Nanoparticles 184 7.5 Silicon Oxide Nanoparticles for Nanoremediation 187 7.6 Other Materials for Nanoremediation 190 7.7 Conclusion 193 References 193 8 Recent Developments in Gold Nanomaterial Catalysts for Oxidation Reaction through Green and Sustainable Routes 197 Biswajit Chowdhury, Chiranjit Santra, Sandip Mandal and Rawesh Kumar 8.1 Introduction 198 8.2 Propylene Epoxidation Reaction 202 8.3 Reaction Mechanism 211 8.4 Glucose Oxidation 214 8.5 Alcohol Oxidation 225 8.6 Conclusion 234 References 234 9 Nanosized Metal Oxide-Based Adsorbents for Heavy Metal Removal: A Review 243 Deepak Pathania and Pardeep Singh 9.1 Introduction 244 9.2 Nanosized Metal Oxide 246 9.3 Hybrid Adsorbents 253 9.4 Conclusion 258 References 258 10 Future Prospects of Phytosynthesized Transition Metal Nanoparticles as Novel Functional Agents for Textiles 265 Shahid-ul-Islam, Mohammad Shahid and Faqeer Mohammad 10.1 Introduction 266 10.2 Synthesis of Transition Metal Nanoparticle Using Various Plant Parts 266 10.3 Proposed Mechanisms 279 10.4 Transition Metal Nanoparticles as Novel Antimicrobial Agents for Textile Modifications 282 10.5 Concluding Remarks and Future Aspects 284 References 285 11 Functionalized Magnetic Nanoparticles for Heavy Metal Removal from Aqueous Solutions: Kinetics and Equilibrium Modeling 291 Ravindra Kumar Gautam, Amita Jaiswal and Mahesh Chandra Chattopadhyaya 11.1 Introduction 291 11.2 Sources of Heavy Metals in the Environment 292 11.3 Toxicity to Human Health and Ecosystems 299 11.4 Magnetic Nanoparticles 303 11.5 Synthesis of Magnetic Nanoparticles 304 11.6 Magnetic Nanoparticles in Wastewater Treatment 310 11.7 Modeling of Adsorption: Kinetic and Isotherm Models 316 11.8 Thermodynamic Analysis 322 11.9 Metal Recovery and Regeneration of Magnetic Nanoparticles 323 11.10 Conclusions 324 Acknowledgements 325 References 325 12 Potential Application of Nanoparticles as Antipathogens 333 Pratima Chauhan, Mini Mishra and Deepika Gupta 12.1 Introduction 333 12.2 Applications of Nanoparticles 336 12.3 Nanoparticles in Biology 340 12.4 Uses and Advantages of Nanoparticles in Medicine 341 12.5 Antibacterial Properties of Nanomaterials 342 12.6 Antiviral properties of Nanoparticles 345 12.7 Antifungal Activity 348 12.8 Mechanism of Action of Nanoparticle inside the Body 349 12.9 Detecting the Antipathogenicity of Nanoparticles on Microorganisms in Vitro 350 12.10 Types of Nanoparticles 351 12.11 Synthesis of Nanoparticles by Conventional Methods 351 12.12 Biological Synthesis of Nanoparticles 353 12.13 Characterizations of Nanoparticles 355 12.14 Biocompatibility of Nanoparticles 356 12.15 Toxic Effects of Nanoparticles 356 12.16 Conclusion 359 References 360 13 Gas Barrier Properties of Biopolymer-Based Nanocomposites: Application in Food Packaging 369 Sarat Kumar Swain 13.1 Introduction 370 13.2 Experimental 372 13.3 Objective 372 13.4 Background of Food Packaging 373 13.5 Conclusion 382 References 382 14 Application of Zero-Valent Iron Nanoparticles for Environmental Clean Up 385 Ritu Singh and Virendra Misra 14.1 Introduction 386 14.2 Zero-Valent Iron Nanoparticles: A Versatile Tool for Environmental Clean Up 388 14.3 Reduction Mechanisms and Pathways 406 14.4 Pilot- and Field-Scale Studies 408 14.5 Transport of nFe0 in Environment 410 14.6 Integrated Approach 411 14.7 Challenges Ahead 412 14.8 Concluding Remarks 413 References 414 15 Typical Synthesis and Environmental Application of Novel TiO2 Nanoparticles 421 Tanmay Kumar Ghorai 15.1 Introduction 421 15.2 Use of Different Dyes 424 15.3 Synthetic Methods for Novel Titania Photocatalysts 427 15.4 Novel Chemical Synthesis Routes 438 References 445 16 Zinc Oxide Nanowire Films: Solution Growth, Defect States and Electrical Conductivity 453 Ajay Kushwaha and M. Aslam 16.1 Introduction 453 16.2 Solution Growth of ZnO Nanowire Films 456 16.3 Defects and Photoluminescence Properties of ZnO 465 16.4 Role of Defect States in Electrical Conductivity of ZnO 469 16.5 Defects and Electrical Conductivity of ZnO Nanowire Films 471 16.6 ZnO Nanowires for Energy Conversion Devices 478 References 483 Index 493

    15 in stock

    £157.45

  • Tailored OrganicInorganic Materials

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Tailored OrganicInorganic Materials

    10 in stock

    Book SynopsisThis book explores the limitless ability to design new materials by layering clay materials within organic compounds. Assembly, properties, characterization, and current and potential applications are offered to inspire the development of novel materials. Coincides with the government''s Materials Genome Initiative, to inspire the development of green, sustainable, robust materials that lead to efficient use of limited resources Contains a thorough introductory and chemical foundation before delving into techniques, characterization, and properties of these materials Applications in biocatalysis, drug delivery, and energy storage and recovery are discussed Presents a case for an often overlooked hybrid material: organic-clay materials Table of ContentsList of Contributors xi Preface xiii 1 Zirconium Phosphate Nanoparticles and Their Extraordinary Properties 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Synthesis and Crystal Structure of α-Zirconium Phosphate 2 1.3 Zirconium Phosphate-Based Dialysis Process 5 1.4 ZrP Titration Curves 7 1.5 Applications of Ion-Exchange Processes 11 1.6 Nuclear Ion Separations 11 1.7 Major Uses of α-ZrP 12 1.8 Polymer Nanocomposites 12 1.9 More Details on α-ZrP: Surface Functionalization 17 1.10 Janus Particles 18 1.11 Catalysis 20 1.12 Catalysts Based on Sulphonated Zirconium Phenylphosphonates 22 1.13 Proton Conductivity and Fuel Cells 27 1.14 Gel Synthesis and Fuel Cell Membranes 30 1.15 Electron Transfer Reactions 32 1.16 Drug Delivery 34 1.17 Conclusions 39 References 40 2 Tales from the Unexpected: Chemistry at the Surface and Interlayer Space of Layered Organic–Inorganic Hybrid Materials Based on γ-Zirconium Phosphate 45 2.1 Introduction 45 2.2 The Inorganic Scaffold: γ-Zirconium Phosphate (Microwave-Assisted Synthesis) 46 2.3 Microwave-Assisted Synthesis of γ-ZrP 48 2.4 Reactions 51 2.4.1 Intercalation 51 2.4.2 Microwave-Assisted Intercalation into γ-ZrP 52 2.4.3 Phosphate/Phosphonate Topotactic Exchange 52 2.5 Labyrinth Materials: Applications 57 2.5.1 Recognition Management 57 2.5.1.1 Chirality at Play 62 2.5.1.2 Gas and Vapour Storage 69 2.5.2 Dissymmetry and Luminescence Signalling 71 2.5.3 Building DSSCs 75 2.5.4 Molecular Confinement 77 2.6 Conclusion and Prospects 78 References 79 3 Phosphonates in Matrices 83 3.1 Introduction: Phosphonic Acids as Versatile Molecules 83 3.2 Acid–Base Chemistry of Phosphonic Acids 84 3.3 Interactions between Metal Ions and Phosphonate Ligands 87 3.4 Phosphonates in ‘All-Organic’ Polymeric Salts 90 3.5 Phosphonates in Coordination Polymers 96 3.6 Phosphonate-Grafted Polymers 97 3.7 Polymers as Hosts for Phosphonates and Metal Phosphonates 108 3.8 Applications 113 3.8.1 Proton Conductivity 113 3.8.2 Metal Ion Absorption 117 3.8.3 Controlled Release of Phosphonate Pharmaceuticals 119 3.8.4 Corrosion Protection by Metal Phosphonate Coatings 125 3.8.5 Gas Storage 125 3.8.6 Intercalation 126 3.9 Conclusions 127 References 128 4 Hybrid Materials Based on Multifunctional Phosphonic Acids 137 4.1 Introduction 137 4.2 Structural Trends and Properties of Functionalized Metal Phosphonates 138 4.2.1 Monophosphonates 138 4.2.1.1 Metal Alkyl- and Aryl-Carboxyphosphonates 138 4.2.1.2 Hydroxyl-Carboxyphosphonates 143 4.2.1.3 Nitrogen-funcionalized phosphonates 147 4.2.1.4 Metal Phosphonatosulphonates 149 4.2.2 Diphosphonates 150 4.2.2.1 Aryldiphosphonates: 1,4-Phenylenebisphosphonates and Related Materials 151 4.2.2.2 1-Hydroxyethylidinediphosphonates 155 4.2.2.3 R-Amino-N,N-bis(methylphosphonates) and R-N,N′]bis(methylphosphonates) 156 4.2.3 Polyphosphonates 163 4.2.3.1 Functionalized Metal Triphosphonates 163 4.2.3.2 Functionalized Metal Tetraphosphonates 167 4.3 Some Relevant Applications of Multifunctional Metal Phosphonates 174 4.3.1 Gas Adsorption 175 4.3.2 Catalysis and Photocatalysis 175 4.3.3 Proton Conductivity 176 4.4 Concluding Remarks 181 References 181 5 Hybrid Multifunctional Materials Based on Phosphonates, Phosphinates and Auxiliary Ligands 193 5.1 Introduction 193 5.1.1 Phosphonates and Phosphinates as Ligands for CPs: Differences in Their Coordination Capabilities 195 5.1.2 The Role of the Auxiliary Ligands 196 5.1.2.1 N-Donors 196 5.1.2.2 O-Donors 198 5.2 CPs Based on Phosphonates and N-Donor Auxiliary Ligands 199 5.2.1 2,2′-Bipyridine and Related Molecules 199 5.2.2 Terpyridine and Related Molecules 210 5.2.3 4,4′-Bipy and Related Molecules 210 5.2.4 Imidazole and Related Molecules 222 5.2.5 Other Ligands 225 5.3 CPs Based on Phosphonates and O-Donor Auxiliary Ligands 228 5.4 CPs Based on Phosphinates and Auxiliary Ligands 233 5.5 Conclusions and Outlooks 240 References 241 6 Hybrid and Biohybrid Materials Based on Layered Clays 245 6.1 Introduction: Clay Concepts and Intercalation Behaviour of Layered Silicates 245 6.2 Intercalation Processes in 1 : 1 Phyllosilicates 247 6.3 Intercalation in 2 : 1 Charged Phyllosilicates 252 6.3.1 Intercalation of Neutral Organic Molecules in 2: 1 Charged Phyllosilicates 252 6.3.2 Intercalation of Organic Cations in 2 : 1 Charged Phyllosilicates: Organoclays 256 6.4 Intercalation of Polymers in Layered Clays 263 6.4.1 Polymer–Clay Nanocomposites 263 6.4.2 Biopolymer Intercalations: Bionanocomposites 269 6.5 Uses of Clay–Organic Intercalation Compounds: Perspectives towards New Applications as Advanced Materials 275 6.5.1 Selective Adsorption and Separation 276 6.5.2 Catalysis and Supports for Organic Reactions 280 6.5.3 Membranes, Ionic and Electronic Conductors and Sensors 281 6.5.4 Photoactive Materials 284 6.5.5 Biomedical Applications 284 References 286 7 Fine-Tuning the Functionality of Inorganic Surfaces Using Phosphonate Chemistry 299 7.1 Phosphonate-Based Modified Surfaces: A Brief Overview 299 7.2 Biological Applications of Phosphonate-Derivatized Inorganic Surfaces 300 7.2.1 Phosphonate Coatings as Bioactive Surfaces 300 7.2.1.1 Supported Lipid Bilayer 300 7.2.1.2 Surface-Modified Nanoparticles 303 7.2.2 Specific Binding of Biological Species onto Phosphonate Surfaces for the Design of Microarrays, 304 7.2.2.1 Single- and Double-Stranded Oligonucleotides 304 7.2.2.2 Proteins and Other Biomolecules 306 7.2.3 Calcium Phosphate/Bisphosphonate Combination as a Route to Implantable Biomedical Devices 308 7.3 Conclusion 314 References 315 8 Photofunctional Polymer/Layered Silicate Hybrids by Intercalation and Polymerization Chemistry 319 8.1 Introduction 319 8.2 Lighting Is Changing 320 8.3 Generalities 321 8.3.1 Layered Silicates 321 8.3.2 Polymer/Layered Silicate Hybrid Structures 322 8.3.3 Methods of Preparation of PNs 323 8.4 Functional Intercalated Compounds 324 8.4.1 Dyes Intercalated Hybrids and (Co)intercalated PNs 324 8.4.2 Light-Emitting Polymer Hybrids 331 8.4.2.1 Poly( p-Phenylene Vinylene)-Based Polymer Hybrids 331 8.4.2.2 Poly(fluorene)-Based Polymer Hybrids 333 8.5 Conclusions and Perspectives 337 References 338 9 Rigid Phosphonic Acids as Building Blocks for Crystalline Hybrid Materials 341 9.1 Introduction 341 9.2 O verview of the Synthesis of Rigid Functional Aromatic and Heteroaromatic Phosphonic Acids 343 9.3 Synthetic Methods to Produce Phosphonic-Based Hybrids 346 9.4 Hybrid Materials from Rigid Di- and Polyphosphonic Acids 347 9.5 Hybrid Materials from Rigid Hetero-polyfunctional Precursors 357 9.5.1 Phosphonic–Carboxylic Acids 357 9.5.2 Phosphonic–Sulphonic Acids 366 9.5.3 O ther Functional Groups 368 9.6 Hybrid Materials from Phosphonic Acids Linked to a Heterocyclic Compound 369 9.6.1 Aza-heterocyclic 369 9.6.2 Thio-heterocycles 373 9.7 Physical Properties and Applications 376 9.7.1 Magnetism 376 9.7.2 Fluorescence 378 9.7.3 Thermal Stability 382 9.7.4 Drug Release 384 9.8 Conclusion and Perspectives 386 References 387 10 Drug Carriers Based on Zirconium Phosphate Nanoparticles 395 10.1 Introduction 395 10.1.1 Zirconium Phosphates 396 10.1.2 Pre-intercalation and the Exfoliation (Layer-by-Layer) Method 397 10.1.3 Direct Ion Exchange of ZrP 399 10.1.4 Direct Ion Exchange Using θ-ZrP 400 10.2 Drug Nanocarriers Based on θ-ZrP 402 10.2.1 Insulin 402 10.2.2 Anticancer Agents 410 10.2.2.1 Nanoparticles and the Enhanced Permeability and Retention Effect 410 10.2.2.2 Cisplatin 410 10.2.2.3 Doxorubicin 418 10.2.2.4 Metallocenes 422 10.2.3 Neurological Agents 428 10.2.3.1 CBZ 429 10.2.3.2 DA 430 10.3 Conclusion 431 References 431

    10 in stock

    £117.85

  • Advanced Sensor and Detection Materials

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Advanced Sensor and Detection Materials

    2 in stock

    Book SynopsisThe development of sensors at macroscopic or nanometric scales in solid, liquid, or gas phases, contact or noncontact configurations, has driven the research of sensor & detection materials and technology into high gear.Table of ContentsPreface xv Part 1: Principals and Prospective 1 1 Advances in Sensors? Nanotechnology 3 Ida Tiwari and Manorama Singh 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 What is Nanotechnology? 4 1.3 Significance of Nanotechnology 5 1.4 Synthesis of Nanostructure 5 1.5 Advancements in Sensors’ Research Based on Nanotechnology 5 1.6 Use of Nanoparticles 7 1.7 Use of Nanowires and Nanotubes 8 1.8 Use of Porous Silicon 11 1.9 Use of Self-Assembled Nanostructures 12 1.10 Receptor-Ligand Nanoarrays 12 1.11 Characterization of Nanostructures and Nanomaterials 13 1.12 Commercialization Efforts 14 1.13 Future Perspectives 14 References 15 2 Construction of Nanostructures: A Basic Concept Synthesis and Their Applications 19 Rizwan Wahab, Farheen Khan, Nagendra K. Kaushik, Javed Musarrat and Abdulaziz A.Al-Khedhairy 2.1 Introduction 20 2.2 Formation of Zinc Oxide Quantum Dots (ZnO-QDs) and Their Applications 24 2.3 Needle-Shaped Zinc Oxide Nanostructures and Their Growth Mechanism 30 2.4 Flower-Shaped Zinc Oxide Nanostructures and Their Growth Mechanism 37 2.5 Construction of Mixed Shaped Zinc Oxide Nanostructures and Their Growth Mechanicsm 47 2.6 Summary and Future Directions 56 References 57 3 The Role of the Shape in the Design of New Nanoparticles 61 G. Mayeli Estrada-Villegas and Emilio Bucio 3.1 Introduction 62 3.2 The Importance of Shape as Nanocarries 63 3.3 Influence of Shape on Biological Process 65 3.4 Different Shapes of Polymeric Nanoparticles 67 3.5 Different Shapes of Non-Polymeric Nanoparticles 71 3.6 Different Shapes of Polymeric Nanoparticles: Examples 74 3.7 Another Type of Nanoparticles 76 Acknowledgments 80 References 80 4 Molecularly Imprinted Polymer as Advanced Material for Development of Enantioselective Sensing Devices 87 Mahavir Prasad Tiwari and Bhim Bali Prasad 4.1 Introduction 88 4.2 Molecularly Imprinted Chiral Polymers 90 4.3 MIP-Based Chiral Sensing Devices 91 4.4 Conclusion 105 References 105 5 Role of Microwave Sintering in the Preparation of Ferrites for High Frequency Applications 111 S. Bharadwaj and S.R. Murthy 5.1 Microwaves in General 112 5.2 Microwave-Material Interactions 114 5.3 Microwave Sintering 115 5.4 Microwave Equipment 118 5.5 Kitchen Microwave Oven Basic Principle 122 5.6 Microwave Sintering of Ferrites 126 5.7 Microwave Sintering of Garnets 137 5.8 Microwave Sintering of Nanocomposites 138 References 140 Part 2: New Materials and Methods 147 6 Mesoporous Silica: Making “Sense” of Sensors 149 Surender Duhan and Vijay K. Tomer 6.1 Introduction to Sensors 150 6.2 Fundamentals of Humidity Sensors 153 6.3 Types of Humidity Sensors 154 6.4 Humidity Sensing Materials 156 6.5 Issues with Traditional Materials in Sensing Technology 158 6.6 Introduction to Mesoporous Silica 159 6.7 M41S Materials 160 6.8 SBA Materials 162 6.9 Structure of SBA-15 164 6.10 Structure Directing Agents of SBA-15 165 6.11 Factors Affecting Structural Properties and Morphology of SBA-15 169 6.12 Modification of Mesoporous Silica 174 6.13 Characterization Techniques for Mesoporous Materials 177 6.14 Humidity Sensing of SBA-15 184 6.15 Extended Family of Mesoporous Silica 185 6.16 Other Applications of SBA-15 188 6.17 Conclusion 190 References 191 7 Towards Improving the Functionalities of Porous TiO2-Au/Ag Based Materials 193 Monica Baia, Virginia Danciu, Zsolt Pap and Lucian Baia 7.1 Porous Nanostructures Based on Tio2 and Au/Ag Nanoparticles for Environmental Applications 194 7.2 Morphological Particularities of the TiO2-based Aerogels 199 7.3 Designing the TiO2 Porous Nano-architectures for Multiple Applications 201 7.4 Evaluating the Photocatalytic Performances of the TiO2-Au/Ag Porous Nanocomposites for Destroying Water Chemical Pollutants 208 7.5 Testing the Effectiveness of the TiO2-Au/Ag Porous Nanocomposites for Sensing Water Chemical Pollutants by SERS 210 7.6 In-depth Investigations of the Most Efficient Multifunctional TiO2-Au/Ag Porous Nanocomposites 216 7.7 Conclusions 221 Acknowledgments 223 References 223 8 Ferroelectric Glass-Ceramics 229 Viswanathan Kumar 8.1 Introduction 230 8.2 (Ba1-xSrx)TiO3 [BST] Glass-Ceramics 232 8.3 Glass-Ceramic System (1-y) BST: y (B2O3: x SiO2) 234 8.4 Glass-Ceramic System (1-y) BST: y (BaO: Al2O3: 2SiO2) 245 8.5 Comparision of the Two BST Glass-Ceramic Systems 254 8.6 Pb(ZrxTi1-x)TiO3[PZT] Glass-Ceramics 256 References 263 9 NASICON: Synthesis, Structure and Electrical Characterization 265 Umaru Ahmadu 9.1 Introduction 265 9.2 Theretical Survey of Superionic Conduction 268 9.3 NASICON Synthesis 271 9.4 NASICON Structure and Properties 273 9.5 Characterization Techniques 278 9.6 Experimental Results 291 9.7 Problems, Applications, and Prospects 299 9.8 Conclusion 300 Acknowledgments 300 References 300 10 Ionic Liquids 309 Arnab De, Manika Dewan and Subho Mozumdar 10.1 Ionic Liquids: What Are They? 309 10.2 Historical Background 310 10.3 Classification of Ionic Liquids 311 10.4 Properties of Ionic Liquids, Physical and Chemical 314 10.5 Synthesis Methods of Ionic Liquids 323 10.6 Characterization of Ionic Liquids 329 10.7 Major Applications of ILs 330 10.8 ILs in Organic Transformations 331 10.9 ILs for Synthesis and Stabilization of Metal Nanoparticles 339 10.10 Challenges with Ionic Liquids 344 References 346 11 Dendrimers and Hyperbranched Polymers 369 Jyotishmoy Borah and Niranjan Karak 11.1 Introduction 369 11.2 Synthesis of Dendritic Polymers 372 11.3 Characterization 385 11.4 Properties 391 11.5 Applications 398 11.6 Conclusion 403 References 404 Part 3: Advanced Structures and Properties 413 12 Theoretical Investigation of Superconducting State Parameters of Bulk Metallic Glasses 415 Aditya M. Vora 12.1 Introduction 415 12.2 Computational Methodology 417 12.3 Results and Discussion 421 12.4 Conclusions 434 References 434 13 Macroscopic Polarization and Thermal Conductivity of Binary Wurtzite Nitrides 439 Bijaya Kumar Sahoo 13.1 Introduction 440 13.2 The Macroscopic Polarization 441 13.3 Effective Elastic Constant, C44 442 13.4 Group Velocity of Phonons 443 13.5 Phonon Scattering Rates 444 13.6 Thermal Conductivity of InN 445 13.7 Summary 449 References 450 14 Experimental and Theoretical Background to Study Materials 453 Arnab De, Manika Dewan and Subho Mozumdar 14.1 Quasi-Elastic Light Scattering (Photon Correlation Spectroscopy) 453 14.2 Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) 456 14.3 Scanning Electron Microscopy [2] 457 14.4 X-ray Diffraction (XRD) 459 14.5 UV-visible Spectroscopy 461 14.6 FT-IR Spectroscopy 462 14.7 NMR Spectroscopy 463 14.8 Mass Spectrometry 464 14.9 Vibrating Sample Magnetometer 465 References 466 15 Graphene and Its Nanocomposites for Gas Sensing Applications 467 Parveen Saini, Tapas Kuila, Sanjit Saha and Naresh Chandra Murmu 15.1 Introduction 468 15.2 Principles of Chemical Sensing by Conducting Nanocomposite Materials 470 15.3 Synthesis of Graphene and Its Nanocomposites 472 15.4 Characterization of Graphene and Its Nanocomposites 473 15.5 Chemical Sensing of Graphene and Its Nanocomposites 477 15.6 Conclusion and Future Aspects 493 Acknowledgements 494 References 494 Index 501

    2 in stock

    £157.45

  • Biosensors Nanotechnology

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Biosensors Nanotechnology

    1 in stock

    Book SynopsisProvides detailed reviews of a range of nanostructures used in the construction of biosensors as well as the applications of these biosensor nanotechnologies in the biological, chemical, and environmental monitoring fields. This book examines some of the emerging technologies that are fueling scientific discovery and underpinning new products.Table of ContentsPreface xv Part 1: New Materials and Methods 1 1 ZnO and Graphene Microelectrode Applications in Biosensing 3 Susana Campuzano, María Pedrero, Georgia-Paraskevi Nikoleli, José M. Pingarron, Dimitrios P. Nikolelis, Nikolaos Tzamtzis and Vasillios N. Psychoyios 1.1 Biosensors Based on Nanostructured Materials 4 1.2 Graphene Nanomaterials Used in ElectrochemicalBiosensor Fabrication 5 1.3 ZnO Nanostructures Used in the Fabrication of Electrochemical Biosensors 7 1.4 Miniaturized Graphene and ZnO Nanostructured Electrochemical Biosensors for Food and Clinical Applications 10 1.5 Conclusions and Future Prospects 30 Acknowledgements 32 References 32 2 Assembly of Polymers/Metal Nanoparticles and Their Applications as Medical Devices 37 Magdalena Stevanovic 2.1 Introduction 38 2.2 Platinum Nanoparticles 40 2.3 Gold Nanoparticles 41 2.4 Silver Nanoparticles 44 2.5 Assembly of Polymers/Silver Nanoparticles 45 2.6 Conclusion 51 Acknowledgements 51 References 52 3 Gold Nanoparticle-Based Electrochemical Biosensors for Medical Applications 63 Ülkü Anik 3.1 Introduction 63 3.2 Gold Nanoparticles 64 3.3 Conclusion 76 References 76 4 Impedimetric DNA Biosensors Based on Nanomaterials 81 Manel del Valle and Alessandra Bonanni 4.1 Introduction 82 4.2 Electrochemical Impedance Spectroscopy for Genosensing 85 4.3 Nanostructured Carbon Used in Impedimetric Genosensors 91 4.4 Nanostructured Gold Used in Impedimetric Genosensors 97 4.5 Quantum Dots for Impedimetric Genosensing 100 4.6 Impedimetric Genosensors for Point-of-Care Diagnosis 101 4.7 Conclusions (Past, Present and Future Perspectives) 102 Acknowledgements 104 References 104 5 Graphene: Insights of its Application in Electrochemical Biosensors for Environmental Monitoring 111 G.A. Álvarez-Romero, G. Alarcon-Angeles and A. Merkoçi 5.1 Introduction 112 5.2 Environmental Applications of Graphene-based Biosensors 117 5.3 Conclusions and Perspectives 133 References 134 6 Functional Nanomaterials for Multifarious Nanomedicine 141 Ravindra P. Singh, Jeong-Woo Choi, Ashutosh Tiwari and Avinash Chand Pandey 6.1 Introduction 142 6.2 Nanoparticle Coatings 145 6.3 Cyclic Peptides 147 6.4 Dendrimers 149 6.5 Fullerenes/Carbon Nanotubes/Graphene 156 6.6 Functional Drug Carriers 157 6.7 MRI Scanning Nanoparticles 162 6.8 Nanoemulsions 165 6.9 Nanofibers 166 6.10 Nanoshells 169 6.11 Quantum Dots 171 6.12 Nanoimaging 179 6.13 Inorganic Nanoparticles 180 6.14 Conclusions 182 Acknowledgement 183 References 183 Part 2: Principals and Prospective 199 7 Computational Nanochemistry Study of the Molecular Structure, Spectra and Chemical Reactivity Properties of the BFPF Green Fluorescent Protein Chromophore 201 Daniel Glossman-Mitnik 7.1 Introduction 201 7.2 Theory and Computational Details 202 7.3 Results and Discussion 206 7.4 Conclusions 233 Acknowledgements 234 References 234 8 Biosynthesis of etal Nanoparticles and Their Applications 239 Meryam Sardar, Abhijeet Mishra and Razi Ahmad 8.1 Introduction 240 8.2 Synthesis of Metal Nanoparticles 241 8.3 Applications 253 8.4 Conclusions 255 Acknowledgement 256 References 257 9 Ionic Discotic Liquid Crystals: Recent Advances and Applications 267 Santanu Kumar Pal and Sandeep Kumar 9.1 Introduction 268 9.2 Part I: Chromonic LCs 271 9.3 Part II: Thermotropic Ionic Discotic Liquid Crystals 282 Acknowledgement 309 References 309 10 Role of Advanced Materials as Nanosensors in Water Treatment 315 Sheenam Thatai, Parul Khurana and Dinesh Kumar 10.1 Introduction 315 10.2 Nanoparticles 318 10.3 Different Fabrication Methods of Nanoparticles 319 10.4 Core Material/Nanofillers 321 10.5 Shell Material/Nanomatrix 324 10.6 Core-Shell Material 326 10.7 Properties of Metal Nanoparticles and Core-Shell Nanocomposites 330 10.8 Detection of Heavy Metals Using Smart Core-Shell Nanocomposites 333 10.9 Conclusions 337 Acknowledgement 337 References 338 Part 3: Advanced Structures and Properties 345 11 Application of Bioconjugated Nanoporous Gold Films in Electrochemical Biosensors 347 Leila Kashefi-Kheyrabadi, Abolhassan Noori and Masoud Ayatollahi Mehrgardi 11.1 Introduction 348 11.2 Fabrication of Nanoporous Gold 349 11.3 Nucleic Acids (NAs)-Based Biosensors 351 11.4 Protein-Nanostructured Gold Bioconjugates in Biosensing 356 11.5 Conclusion 369 References 369 12 Combination of Molecular Imprinting and Nanotechnology: Beginning of a New Horizon 375 Rashmi Madhuri, Ekta Roy, Kritika Gupta and Prashant K. Sharma 12.1 Introduction 376 12.2 Classification of Imprinted Nanomaterials 383 12.3 Imprinted Materials at Nanoscale 421 12.4 Conclusions and Future Outlook 427 Acknowledgements 428 References 428 13 Structural, Electrical and Magnetic Properties of Pure and Substituted BiFeO3 Multiferroics 433 S. Jangid, S. K. Barbar and M. Roy 13.1 Introduction 434 13.2 Synthesis of Materials 446 13.3 Structural and Morphological Analyses 454 13.4 Electrical Properties 467 13.5 Magnetic Properties 476 13.6 Thermal Analysis (MDSC Studies) 489 13.7 Summary and Conclusion 496 References 498 14 Synthesis, Characterization and Rietveld Studies of Sr-modified PZT Ceramics 507 Kumar Brajesh, A.K. Himanshu and N.K. Singh 14.1 Introduction 508 14.2 Experiment 509 14.3 Rietveld Refinement Details 510 14.4 Results and Discussion 511 14.5 Conclusions 521 References 521 Index 523

    1 in stock

    £157.45

  • Advanced Healthcare Materials

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Advanced Healthcare Materials

    7 in stock

    Book SynopsisOffers a comprehensive and interdisciplinary view of the research on advanced materials for healthcare technology and applications. This book summarizes the state of knowledge in the field of advanced materials for functional therapeutics, point-of-care diagnostics, translational materials, and up-and-coming bioengineering devices.Trade Review“Although they claim in the Preface that this book is written for university students and researchers from diverse backgrounds, I believe having read the majority of the scientific aspects of the work it really expects the reader to have a very thorough knowledge of polymer chemistry at the nanometer level of particle or pore size and suggest this book is aimed at the researchers in the pharmaceutical industry or academics in pharmaceutical chemistry research rather than researchers into biomaterials.” (Scope, 1 February 2014) Table of ContentsPreface xvii 1 Stimuli-Responsive Smart Nanoparticles for Biomedical Application 1 Arnab De, Sushil Mishra and Subho Mozumdar 1.1 A Brief Overview of Nanotechnology 2 1.2 Nanoparticulate Delivery Systems 3 1.3 Delivery Systems 4 1.4 Polymers for Nanoparticle Synthesis 11 1.5 Synthesis of Nanovehicles 15 1.6 Dispersion of Preformed Polymers 16 1.7 Emulsion Polymerization 20 1.8 Purification of Nanoparticle 22 1.9 Drying of Nanoparticles 24 1.10 Drug Loading 25 1.11 Drug Release 26 1.12 Conclusion 27 References 27 2 Diagnosis and Treatment of Cancer—Where We Are and Where We Have to Go! 35 Rajiv Lochan Gaur and Richa Srivastava 2.1 Cancer Pathology 36 2.2 Cancer Diagnosis 37 2.3 Treatment 41 Conclusion 42 References 42 3 Advanced Materials for Biomedical Application and Drug Delivery 47 Salam J.J. Titinchi, Mayank P. Singh, Hanna S. Abbo and Ivan R. Green 3.1 Introduction 48 3.2 Anticancer Drug Entrapped Zeolite Structures as Drug Delivery Systems 48 3.3 Mesoporous Silica Nanoparticles and Multifunctional Magnetic Nanoparticles in Biomedical Applications 52 3.4 BioMOFs: Metal-Organic Frameworks for Biological and Medical Applications 64 3.5 Conclusions 75 References 75 4 Nanoparticles for Diagnosis and/or Treatment of Alzheimer’s Disease 85 S.G. Antimisiaris, S. Mourtas, E. Markoutsa, A. Skouras, and K. Papadia 4.1 Introduction 85 4.2 Nanoparticles 86 4.3 Physiological Factors Related with Brain-Located Pathologies: Focus on AD 96 4.4 Current Methodologies to Target AD-Related Pathologies 110 4.5 Nanoparticles for Diagnosis of AD 136 4.6 Nanoparticles for Therapy of AD 146 4.7 Summary of Current Progress and Future Challenges 160 Acknowledgments 161 References 161 5 Novel Biomaterials for Human Health: Hemocompatible Polymeric Micro-and Nanoparticles and Their Application in Biosensor 179 Chong Sun, Xiaobo Wang, Chun Mao and Jian Shen 5.1 Introduction 179 5.2 Design and Preparation of Hemocompatible Polymeric Micro- and Nanoparticles 181 5.3 The Biosafety and Hemocompatibility Evaluation System for Polymeric Micro- and Nanoparticles 183 5.4 Construction of Biosensor for Direct Detection in Whole Blood 188 5.5 Conclusion and Prospect 194 References 195 6 The Contribution of Smart Materials and Advanced Clinical Diagnostic Micro-Devices on the Progress and Improvement of Human Health Care 199 Teles, F.R.R. and Fonseca, L.P. 6.1 Introduction 200 6.2 Physiological Biomarkers as Targets in Clinical Diagnostic Bioassays 202 6.3 Biosensors 205 6.4 Advanced Materials and Nanostructures for Health Care Applications 217 6.5 Applications of Micro-Devices to Some Important Clinical Pathologies 223 6.6 Conclusions and Future Prospects 227 Acknowledgment 227 References 228 7 Hierarchical Modeling of Elastic Behavior of Human Dental Tissue Based on Synchrotron Diffraction Characterization 233 TanSui and Alexander M. Korsunsky 7.1 Introduction 233 7.2 Experimental Techniques 236 7.3 Model Formulation 238 7.4 Experimental Results and Model Validation 245 7.5 Discussion 251 7.6 Conclusions 255 Acknowledgments 256 Appendix 256 References 260 8 Biodegradable Porous Hydrogels 263 Martin Pradny, Miroslav Vetrik, Martin Hruby and Jiri Michalek 8.1 Introduction 263 8.2 Methods of Preparation of Porous Hydrogels 265 8.3 Hydrogels Crosslinked With Degradable Crosslinkers 271 8.4 Hydrogels Degradable in the Main Chain 276 8.5 Conclusions 281 Acknowledgments 281 References 283 9 Hydrogels: Properties, Preparation, Characterization and Biomedical Applications in Tissue Engineering, Drug Delivery and Wound Care 289 Mohammad Sirousazar, Mehrdad Forough, Khalil Farhadi, Yasaman Shaabani and Rahim Molaei 9.1 Introduction 289 9.2 Types of Hydrogels 290 9.3 Properties of Hydrogels 295 9.4 Preparation Methods of Hydrogels 299 9.5 Characterization of Hydrogels 305 9.6 Biomedical Applications of Hydrogels 308 9.7 Hydrogels for Wound Management 319 9.8 Recent Developments on Hydrogels 337 9.9 Conclusions 340 References 341 10 Modified Natural Zeolites—Functional Characterization and Biomedical Application 353 Jela Miliæ, Aleksandra Dakoviæ, Danina Krajišnik and George E. Rottinghaus 10.1 Introduction 354 10.2 Surfactant Modified Zeolites (SMZs) 359 10.3 Minerals as Pharmaceutical Excipients 366 10.4 SMZs for Pharmaceutical Application 372 10.5 Conclusions 389 Acknowledgement 390 References 390 11 Supramolecular Hydrogels Based on Cyclodextrin Poly(Pseudo)Rotaxane for New and Emerging Biomedical Applications 397 JinHuang, Jing Hao, Debbie P. Anderson and Peter R. Chang 11.1 Introduction 398 11.2 Fabrication of Cyclodextrin Poly(pseudo)rotaxane-Based Hydrogels 400 11.3 Stimulus-Response Properties of Cyclodextrin Poly(pseudo)rotaxane Based Hydrogels 409 11.4 Nanocomposite Supramolecular Hydrogels 413 11.5 Biomedical Application of Cyclodextrin Poly(pseudo)rotaxane-Based Hydrogels 420 11.6 Conclusions and Prospects 425 References 425 12 Polyhydroxyalkanoate-Based Biomaterials for Applicationsin Biomedical Engineering 431 Chenghao Zhu and Qizhi Chen 12.1 Introduction 12.2 Synthesis of PHAs 433 12.3 Processing and its Influence on the Mechanical Properties of PHAs 435 12.4 Mechanical Properties of PHA Sheets/Films 436 12.5 PHA-Based Polymer Blends 439 12.6 Summary 451 References 451 13 Biomimetic Molecularly Imprinted Polymers as Smart Materials and Future Perspective in Health Care 457 Mohammad Reza Ganjali, Farnoush Faridbod and Parviz Norouzi 13.1 Molecularly Imprinted Polymer Technology 458 13.2 Synthesis of MIPs 458 13.3 Application of MIPs 463 13.4 Biomimetic Molecules 464 13.5 MIPs as Receptors in Bio-Molecular Recognition 465 13.6 MIPs as Sensing Elements in Sensors/Biosensors 466 13.7 MIPs as Drug Delivery Systems 467 13.8 MIPs as Sorbent Materials in Separation Science 475 13.9 Future Perspective of MIP Technologies 480 13.10 Conclusion 480 References 480 14 The Role of Immunoassays in Urine Drug Screening 485 Niina J. Ronkainen and Stanley L. Okon 14.1 Introduction 486 14.2 Urine and Other Biological Specimens 489 14.3 Immunoassays 491 14.4 Drug Screening with Immunoassays 504 14.5 Immunoassay Specificity: False Negative and False Positive Test Results 507 14.6 Confirmatory Secondary Testing Using Chromatography Instruments 510 Conclusion 513 References

    7 in stock

    £157.45

  • Advanced Biomaterials and Biodevices

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Advanced Biomaterials and Biodevices

    1 in stock

    Book SynopsisThis cutting-edge book focuses on the emerging area of biomaterials and biodevices that incorporate therapeutic agents, molecular targeting, and diagnostic imaging capabilities The design and development of biomaterials play a significant role in the diagnosis, treatment, and prevention of diseases.Trade Review“Overall, this is a fascinating series of diverse chapters, with a large range of quality in the presentation and diagram quality, and the reader has to have an extensive knowledge of biochemistry and nanotechnology to really appreciate the cutting edge technology presented in this book.” (Scope, 1 February 2014) Table of ContentsPreface xv Part 1: Cutting-edge Biomaterials 1 Frontiers for Bulk Nanostructured Metals in Biomedical Applications 3 T.C. Lowe and R.Z. Valiev 1.1 Introduction to Nanostructured Metals 3 1.2 Nanostructured Metals as Biomaterials for Medical Applications 10 1.3 Summary and Conclusions 29 Acknowledgment 30 References 30 2 Stimuli-responsive Materials Used as Medical Devices in Loading and Releasing of Drugs 53 H. Iván Meléndez-Ortiz and Emilio Bucio 2.1 Introduction 54 2.2 Classification of Materials for Bioapplications 55 2.3 Responsive Polymers in Controlled Drug Delivery 56 2.4 Types of Medical Devices 60 2.5 Materials Used in Medical Devices 62 2.6 Stimuli-responsive Polymers Used in Medical Devices 65 2.7 Infections Associated with Medical Devices 68 Acknowledgements 72 References 73 3 Recent Advances with Liposomes as Drug Carriers 79 Shravan Kumar Sriraman and Vladimir P. Torchilin 3.1 Introduction 80 3.2 Passive Targeting of Liposomes 83 3.3 Actively Targeted Liposomes 88 3.4 Multifunctional Liposomes 95 3.5 Conclusions and Future Directions 98 References 101 4 Fabrication, Properties of Nanoshells with Controllable Surface Charge and its Applications 121 Parul Khurana, Sheenam Thatai and Dinesh Kumar 4.1 What is Nanotechnology? 122 4.2 Nanomaterials and Their Uses 122 4.3 Classification of Nanomaterials 124 4.4 Nanoparticles 126 4.5 Nanocomposites Material 128 4.6 Spherical Silica Particles 129 4.7 Silver Nanoparticles 132 4.8 Gold Nanoparticles 134 4.9 SiO2@Ag and SiO2@Au Core-shell Nanocomposites 137 4.10 Surface Enhanced Raman Scattering 139 4.11 Conclusions 141 Acknowledgements 141 References 141 5 Chitosan as an Advanced Healthcare Material 147 M.A. Jardine and S. Sayed 147 5.1 Introduction 147 5.2 Chemical Modification and Analysis 150 5.3 Chitosan Co-polymers 154 5.4 Nanoparticles 156 5.5 Nanofibres (Electrospinning) 158 5.6 Visualising Nanostructures 160 5.7 Biomedical Applications of Chitosan 163 5.8 Conclusion 175 References 175 6 Chitosan and Low Molecular Weight Chitosan: Biological and Biomedical Applications 183 Nazma N. Inamdar and Vishnukant Mourya 6.1 Introduction 184 6.2 Biodegradability of Chitin and Chitosan 184 6.3 Biocomapatibility and Toxicology of Chitin and Chitosan 186 6.4 Chitosan as Antimicrobial Agent 187 6.5 Chitosan as Haemostatic Agent 196 6.6 Chitosan as Immunity Modulator 198 6.7 Chitosan as Adjuvant 202 6.8 Chitosan as Wound Healing Accelerator 203 6.9 Chitosan as Lipid Lowering Agent & Dietary Supplement in Aid of Weight Loss 211 6.10 Chitosan as Antioxidant 214 6.11 Conclusion 220 References 221 7 Anticipating Behaviour of Advanced Materials in Healthcare 243 Tanvir Arfin and Simin Fatma 7.1 Introduction 244 7.2 The Evolution of the Bio-advance Materials Fields 246 7.3 Evaluation in Humans 247 7.4 The Natural History of Diseases 248 7.5 Enzyme 249 7.6 Biosensor 259 7.7 Platinum Material Used in Medicine 267 7.8 Antibody 268 7.9 Antibody microarrays 275 7.10 Conclusion 278 References 279 Part 2: Innovative Biodevices 289 8 Label-Free Biochips 291 Anis N. Nordin 8.1 Introduction 291 8.2 Label-Free Analysis 292 8.3 Electrochemical Biosensors 293 8.4 Acoustic Wave-based Mass Sensors 297 8.5 Bulk Acoustic Wave Sensors 297 8.6 Surface Acoustic Wave Mass Sensors 300 8.7 Conclusion and Future Prospects 302 References 303 9 Polymer MEMS Sensors 305 V. Seena, Prasenjithn Ray, Prashanthi Kovur, Manoj Kandpal and V. Ramgopal Rao 9.1 Introduction 306 9.2 Polymer Nanocomposite Piezoresistive Microcantilever Sensors 309 9.3 Organic CantiFET 318 9.4 Polymer Microcantilever Sensors with Embedded Al-doped ZnO Transistor 324 9.5 Piezoelectric Nanocomposite (SU-8/ZNO) Thin Films Studies and Their Integration with Piezoelectric MEMS Devices 327 9.6 Polymer Nanomechanical Cantilever Sensors for Detection of Explosives 334 References 337 10 Assembly of Polymers/Metal Nanoparticles and their Applications as Medical Devices 343 Magdalena Stevanovic 10.1 Introduction 344 10.2 Platinum Nanoparticles 346 10.3 Gold Nanoparticles 347 10.4 Silver Nanoparticles 350 10.5 Assembly of Polymers/Silver Nanoparticles 351 10.6 Conclusion 357 Acknowledgements 357 References 357 11 Combination of Molecular Imprinting and Nanotechnology: Beginning of a New Horizon 367 Rashmi Madhuri, Ekta Roy, Kritika Gupta and Prashant K. Sharma 11.1 Introduction 368 11.2 Classification of Imprinted Nanomaterials 374 11.3 Imprinted Materials at Nanoscale 412 11.4 Conclusions & Future Outlook 418 Acknowledgements 419 References 419 12 Prussian Blue and Analogues: Biosensing Applications in Health Care 423 Salazar P, Martin M, O’Neill RD, Lorenzo-Luis P, Roche R and González-Mora JL 12.1 Introduction 424 12.2 General Aspects of Prussian Blue and Other Hexacyanoferrates 426 12.3 Prussian Blue: Hydrogen Peroxide Electrocatalysis 428 12.4 Prussian Blue: Biosensor Applications 430 12.5 Prussian Blue: Immunosensor Applications 439 12.6 Conclusions 446 Acknowledgment 446 References 447 13 Efficiency of Biosensors as New Generation of Analytical Approaches at the Biochemical Diagnostics of Diseases 451 N.F. Starodub and M. D. Melnychuk 13.1 Introduction 452 13.2 General Approaches for the Development of Optical Immune Biosensors 452 13.3 Electrochemical Enzymatic Biosensors Based on the Ion-sensitive Field Effect Transistors (ISFETs) 471 13.4 Multi-parametrical Biosensors [49-51] 475 13.5 Modeling Selective Sites and their Application in the Sensory Technology 478 13.6 Conclusion 481 References 482 14 Nanoparticles: Scope in Drug Delivery 487 Megha Tanwar, Jaishree Meena and Laxman S. Meena 14.1 Introduction 488 14.2 Different Forms of Nanoparticles as Drug Delivery 489 14.3 Tuberculosis Targeting Nanoparticles 493 14.4 Cancer & Tumor Targeting Nanoparticles 505 14.5 Conclusion 511 References 512 15 Smart Polypeptide Nanocarriers for Malignancy Therapeutics 523 Jianxun Ding, Di Li, Xiuli Zhuang and Xuesi Chen 15.1 Introduction 523 15.2 Smart Polypeptide Nanovehicles for Antitumor Drug Delivery 525 15.3 Conclusions and Perspectives 539 References 539 Index 547

    1 in stock

    £157.45

  • Modeling and Estimation of Structural Damage

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Modeling and Estimation of Structural Damage

    10 in stock

    Book SynopsisModelling and Estimation of Damage in Structures is a comprehensiveguide to solving the type of modelling and estimation problems associated with the physics of structural damage.Table of ContentsPreface xi 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Users' Guide 1 1.2 Modeling and Estimation Overview 2 1.3 Motivation 4 1.4 Structural Health Monitoring 7 1.4.1 Data-Driven Approaches 10 1.4.2 Physics-Based Approach 14 1.5 Organization and Scope 17 2 Probability 21 2.1 Probability Basics 23 2.2 Probability Distributions 25 2.3 Multivariate Distributions, Conditional Probability, and Independence 28 2.4 Functions of Random Variables 32 2.5 Expectations and Moments 39 2.6 Moment-Generating Functions and Cumulants 43 3 Random Processes 51 3.1 Properties of a Random Process 54 3.2 Stationarity 57 3.3 Spectral Analysis 61 3.3.1 Spectral Representation of Deterministic Signals 62 3.3.2 Spectral Representation of Stochastic Signals 65 3.3.3 Power Spectral Density 67 3.3.4 Relationship to Correlation Functions 71 3.3.5 Higher Order Spectra 74 3.4 Markov Models 81 3.5 Information Theoretics 82 3.5.1 Mutual Information 85 3.5.2 Transfer Entropy 87 3.6 Random Process Models for Structural Response Data 91 4 Modeling in Structural Dynamics 95 4.1 Why Build Mathematical Models? 96 4.2 Good Versus Bad Models – An Example 97 4.3 Elements of Modeling 99 4.3.1 Newton's Laws 101 4.3.2 Background to Variational Methods 101 4.3.3 Variational Mechanics 103 4.3.4 Lagrange's Equations 105 4.3.5 Hamilton's Principle 108 4.4 Common Challenges 114 4.4.1 Impact Problems 114 4.4.2 Stress Singularities and Cracking 117 4.5 Solution Techniques 119 4.5.1 Analytical Techniques I – Ordinary Differential Equations 119 4.5.2 Analytical Techniques II – Partial Differential Equations 128 4.5.3 Local Discretizations 131 4.5.4 Global Discretizations 132 4.6 Volterra Series for Nonlinear Systems 133 5 Physics-Based Model Examples 143 5.1 Imperfection Modeling in Plates 143 5.1.1 Cracks as Imperfections 143 5.1.2 Boundary Imperfections: In-Plane Slippage 145 5.2 Delamination in a Composite Beam 151 5.3 Bolted Joint Degradation: Quasi-static Approach 160 5.3.1 The Model 161 5.3.2 Experimental System and Procedure 164 5.3.3 Results and Discussion 166 5.4 Bolted Joint Degradation: Dynamic Approach 172 5.5 Corrosion Damage 178 5.6 Beam on a Tensionless Foundation 182 5.6.1 Equilibrium Equations and Their Solutions 184 5.6.2 Boundary Conditions 185 5.6.3 Results 187 5.7 Cracked, Axially Moving Wires 189 5.7.1 Some Useful Concepts from Fracture Mechanics 191 5.7.2 The Effect of a Crack on the Local Stiffness 193 5.7.3 Limitations 194 5.7.4 Equations of Motion 196 5.7.5 Natural Frequencies and Stability 198 5.7.6 Results 198 6 Estimating Statistical Properties of Structural Response Data 203 6.1 Estimator Bias and Variance 206 6.2 Method of Maximum Likelihood 209 6.3 Ergodicity 213 6.4 Power Spectral Density and Correlation Functions for LTI Systems 218 6.4.1 Estimation of Power Spectral Density 218 6.4.2 Estimation of Correlation Functions 234 6.5 Estimating Higher Order Spectra 240 6.5.1 Coherence Functions 246 6.5.2 Bispectral Density Estimation 248 6.5.3 Analytical Bicoherence for Non-Gaussian Signals 257 6.5.4 Trispectral Density Function 264 6.6 Estimation of Information Theoretics 275 6.7 Generating Random Processes 284 6.7.1 Review of Basic Concepts 285 6.7.2 Data with a Known Covariance and Gaussian Marginal PDF 287 6.7.3 Data with a Known Covariance and Arbitrary Marginal PDF 290 6.7.4 Examples 295 6.8 Stationarity Testing 302 6.8.1 Reverse Arrangement Test 304 6.8.2 Evolutionary Spectral Testing 306 6.9 Hypothesis Testing and Intervals of Confidence 312 6.9.1 Detection Strategies 313 6.9.2 Detector Performance 319 6.9.3 Intervals of Confidence 327 7 Parameter Estimation for Structural Systems 333 7.1 Method of Maximum Likelihood 336 7.1.1 Linear Least Squares 338 7.1.2 Finite Element Model Updating 341 7.1.3 Modified Differential Evolution for Obtaining MLEs 344 7.1.4 Structural Damage MLE Example 347 7.1.5 Estimating Time of Flight for Ultrasonic Applications 352 7.2 Bayesian Estimation 363 7.2.1 Conjugacy 365 7.2.2 Using Conjugacy to Assess Algorithm Performance 366 7.2.3 Markov Chain Monte Carlo (MCMC) Methods 374 7.2.4 Gibbs Sampling 379 7.2.5 Conditional Conjugacy: Sampling the Noise Variance 380 7.2.6 Beam Example Revisited 383 7.2.7 Population-Based MCMC 386 7.3 Multimodel Inference 392 7.3.1 Model Comparison via AIC 392 7.3.2 Reversible Jump MCMC 397 8 Detecting Damage-Induced Nonlinearity 403 8.1 Capturing Nonlinearity 407 8.1.1 Higher Order Cumulants 408 8.1.2 Higher Order Spectral Coefficients 410 8.1.3 Nonlinear Prediction Error 412 8.1.4 Information Theoretics 414 8.2 Bolted Joint Revisited 415 8.2.1 Composite Joint Experiment 415 8.2.2 Kurtosis Results 417 8.2.3 Spectral Results 419 8.3 Bispectral Detection: The Single Degree-of-Freedom (SDOF), Gaussian Case 421 8.3.1 Bispectral Detection Statistic 422 8.3.2 Test Statistic Distribution 423 8.3.3 Detector Performance 425 8.4 Bispectral Detection: the General Multi-Degree-of-Freedom (MDOF) Case 429 8.4.1 Bicoherence Detection Statistic Distribution 433 8.4.2 Which Bicoherence to Compute? 434 8.4.3 Optimal Input Probability Distribution for Detection 436 8.5 Application of the HOS to Delamination Detection 438 8.6 Method of Surrogate Data 444 8.6.1 Fourier Transform-Based Surrogates 446 8.6.2 AAFT Surrogates 448 8.6.3 IAFFT Surrogates 449 8.6.4 DFT Surrogates 450 8.7 Numerical Surrogate Examples 451 8.7.1 Detection of Bilinear Stiffness 451 8.7.2 Detecting Cubic Stiffness 456 8.7.3 Surrogate Invariance to Ambient Variation 461 8.8 Surrogate Experiments 464 8.8.1 Detection of Rotor – Stator Rub 465 8.8.2 Bolted Joint Degradation with Ocean Wave Excitation 467 8.9 Surrogates for Nonstationary Data 475 8.10 Chapter Summary 476 9 Damage Identification 481 9.1 Modeling and Identification of Imperfections in Shell Structures 481 9.1.1 Modeling of Submerged Shell Structures 482 9.1.2 Non-Contact Results Using Maximum Likelihood 487 9.1.3 Bayesian Identification of Dents 492 9.2 Modeling and Identification of Delamination 501 9.3 Modeling and Identification of Cracked Structures 508 9.3.1 Cracked Plate Model 508 9.3.2 Crack Parameter Identification 510 9.3.3 Optimization of Sensor Placement 523 9.4 Modeling and Identification of Corrosion 527 9.4.1 Experimental Setup 530 9.4.2 Results and Discussion 532 9.5 Chapter Summary 538 10 Decision Making in Condition-Based Maintenance 543 10.1 Structured Decision Making 544 10.2 Example: Ship in Transit 545 10.2.1 Loading Data 547 10.2.2 Ship "Stringer" Model 552 10.2.3 Cumulative Fatigue Model 559 10.3 Optimal Transit 562 10.3.1 Problem Statement 562 10.3.2 Solutions via Dynamic Programming 563 10.3.3 Transit Examples 565 10.4 Summary 568 Appendix A Useful Constants and Probability Distributions 571 Appendix B Contour Integration of Spectral Density Functions 575 Appendix C Derivation of Terms for the Trispectrum of an MDOF Nonlinear Structure 581 C.1 Simplification of CVIII pijk (τ1, τ2, τ3) 582 C.2 Submanifold Terms in the Trispectrum 583 C.3 Complete Trispectrum Expression 585 Index 587

    10 in stock

    £94.00

  • The Global Automotive Industry

    John Wiley & Sons Inc The Global Automotive Industry

    Book SynopsisThe Global Automotive Industry provides a comprehensive overview of the automotive sector, covering the current shape and structure of the industry, how this structure came about and how and where it is under threat.Table of ContentsNotes on Contributors xi Series Preface xvii Foreword xix 1 Introduction and Overview 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Continuity and Change 3 1.3 Overview 4 References 6 2 Understanding Change and Difference in the Global Automotive Industry 7 2.1 Introduction 7 2.2 Socio]Technical Transitions 9 2.3 Varieties of Capitalism 12 2.4 Global Value Chains 14 2.5 Change in the Automotive Industry: A Synthesis 15 2.6 Conclusions 16 References 17 3 The Market for New Cars 19 3.1 Introduction 19 3.2 Market Fragmentation and Lack of Industry Consolidation 20 3.3 Geography of Markets 22 3.4 Mobility Services and the Emergent Automotive Ecosystem 26 3.5 Conclusions 27 References 27 4 Understanding People and Cars 29 4.1 Influences on Travel Choices 29 4.2 Influences on Vehicle Choice 33 4.3 Acceptability of Transport Policies and New Technologies 34 4.4 Conclusions 36 References 37 5 Car Manufacturing 41 5.1 Background and Prehistory 41 5.2 Ford, Budd and Sloan: The History of Mass Car Production 42 5.3 Monocoque Construction: Budd’s Impact on Car Design 44 5.4 Toyotism 45 5.5 Buddism in Crisis? 46 5.6 Lean v Agile 47 5.7 Conclusions 49 References 50 6 Recent Trends in Manufacturing Innovation Policy for the Automotive Sector: A Survey of the United States, Mexico, European Union, Germany and Spain 53 6.1 Introduction 53 6.2 A Changing Manufacturing Landscape 55 6.3 Restructuring in the Automotive Industry 56 6.4 Automotive Policies in the United States, Mexico, EU, Germany and Spain 57 6.4.1 United States 57 6.4.2 Mexico 59 6.4.3 European Union 60 6.4.4 Germany 61 6.4.5 Spain 62 6.5 Conclusion 63 References 64 7 Labour Relations and Human Resource Management in the Automotive Industry: North American Perspectives 67 7.1 Introduction 67 7.2 From Fordist Production to Lean Production: The Evolution of Labour Relations/Human Resource Management Systems in the North American Auto Industry Prior to 2000 70 7.2.1 The Classic Fordist Industrial Relations System in the US and Canadian Automotive Industries 70 7.2.2 The Impact of Japanese Transplants and Lean Production Methods on the North American Automotive Labour Relations System 72 7.3 Developments in North American Auto Labour Relations Since 2000 74 7.3.1 Concession Bargaining 2003–2008 74 7.3.2 The Impact of the Global Financial Crisis 76 7.3.3 Post]Crisis Developments 78 7.4 Conclusion 78 References 80 8 Labour Relations and HRM in the Automotive Industry: Japanese Impacts 83 8.1 Introduction: The Japanese Car Industry and Toyota Production System 83 8.2 TPS and Japanese HRM 85 8.3 ‘Japanization’ of the Global Automotive Industry 88 8.4 Changes in Japanese Labour Relations and HRM 90 8.5 Concluding Remarks 92 References 93 9 The Rise of South Korean (or Korean) Automobile Industry 95 9.1 Introduction 95 9.2 A Brief History of South Korean Automobile Industry and the Performance of HMC 96 9.2.1 Brief History of South Korean Automobile Industry 96 9.2.2 The Change in Performance of HMG 100 9.3 Considering Five Success Factors of HMC 102 9.3.1 Vertical Integration 102 9.3.2 Modularization of Production and Standardization 102 9.3.3 Expansion of Overseas Production Capabilities in Emerging Markets 104 9.3.4 Product Strategy 104 9.3.5 Quality Focused and Design Focused Management 105 9.4 Characteristics of HRM in HMC and Effects on the Management System 106 9.4.1 Militant Trade Union Movement and Confrontational Labour]Management Relations 106 9.4.2 Fragmentation and Automation of Work 106 9.4.3 Internal Competition Systems 107 9.5 Conclusion: New Challenges for the Korean Auto Makers as Multinational Enterprises 107 References 108 10 China’s Car Industry 109 10.1 Background 109 10.2 Pre]History 110 10.3 China’s Car Industry 111 10.4 The Role of Government 114 10.4.1 Traditional Automobile Industries 114 10.5 New Energy Vehicles 118 10.5.1 R&D Support 118 10.5.2 Industrialization 119 10.6 Bringing NEVs to Market 121 10.6.1 Demonstration and Pilot Projects: Strategic Niche Management 121 10.6.2 Financial Incentives 122 10.7 Conclusions 124 References 124 11 Forging Ahead or Stagnating?: An Analysis of Indian Automotive Industry 127 11.1 Introduction 127 11.2 History of the Indian Automotive Industry 128 11.3 Statistics on Automobile Industry Performance 132 11.4 Stagnation of Industry in 2013–2014 133 11.5 Factors Critical to the Growth of the Indian Automotive Industry 133 11.6 Challenges and Future of Indian Automotive Industry 134 References 136 12 From Factory to End]User: An Overview of Automotive Distribution and the Challenges of Disruptive Change 139 12.1 Shipping and Stocking Cars 140 12.2 Retail and Distribution 143 12.3 Changes to the Dealer Model 146 12.4 The Changing Role of Fleets 148 12.5 Delivering Integrated Services Means Rethinking Skills 150 References 150 13 Impacts of Automobility 153 13.1 Introduction 153 13.2 Externalities and Automobility: A Broad Perspective 153 13.3 Death and Injuries from Road Traffic 154 13.4 Environmental Impacts 156 13.5 Toxic Emissions 157 13.6 Current Concerns 159 13.7 Role of the Consumer 160 13.8 Conclusions 161 References 161 14 Regulating the Car 163 14.1 Regulating for Safety 163 14.1.1 Development of Vehicle Standards 164 14.1.2 European Directives 164 14.1.3 US Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 166 14.2 New Car Assessment Programmes 167 14.3 Future Developments 168 14.3.1 Impact of New Vehicle Technologies 169 14.4 Legislating for a Cleaner Environment 170 14.4.1 Fuel Economy: Incentives and Disincentives 171 14.5 Climate Change 172 14.6 Future Developments 173 References 174 15 Global versus Local: Regionalism in a Global Industry 177 15.1 The Old World 177 15.2 Asia 179 15.2.1 The Creation of Two Motoring Cultures: India v China 179 15.3 Latin America 180 15.4 Case Study: On the Margins of Mass Production: Australia 181 References 184 16 The Impact of Electric Automobility 185 16.1 Electric Vehicle Design 185 16.1.1 Battery Electric Vehicles 186 16.1.2 Hybrid Electric Vehicles 186 16.2 Charging Infrastructure – UK Case Study 187 16.3 Electric Vehicles in Europe 191 16.3.1 Urban Electric Vehicles 193 16.3.2 Rural Electric Vehicles – The Welsh Case 193 16.4 Conclusions 197 References 197 17 Alternatives to the Car 199 17.1 Introduction 199 17.2 Defining the Car: Legislative and Market Boundaries 200 17.3 The Hidden World of Non]Car Automobility 202 17.4 Transition by Stealth: The 2W]BEV 203 17.4.1 3W]BEVs 205 17.5 Conclusions 206 References 206 18 New Business Models and the Automotive Industry 209 18.1 Introduction 209 18.2 Fundamentals of the Existing Automotive Industry Business Model 210 18.3 Pressures for Change on the Existing Business Model 212 18.4 Incremental Business Model Evolution in the Automotive Industry 213 18.5 Radical Business Model Innovation in the Automotive Industry 214 18.6 Conclusions and Future Prospects for Business Model Innovation 216 References 216 19 Future Challenges for Product and Industry 219 19.1 Introduction 219 19.2 New Engine Technologies 220 19.3 Owning or Sharing? 223 19.4 The Future Car 223 19.5 The Future Industry 224 References 226 Index 229

    £72.86

  • Mechatronics with Experiments

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Mechatronics with Experiments

    Book SynopsisComprehensively covers the fundamental scientific principles and technologies that are used in the design of modern computer-controlled machines and processes.Table of ContentsPREFACE xi ABOUT THE COMPANION WEBSITE xii CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1.1 Case Study: Modeling and Control of Combustion Engines 16 1.2 Example: Electro-hydraulic Flight Control Systems for Commercial Airplanes 31 1.3 Embedded Control Software Development for Mechatronic Systems 38 1.4 Problems 43 CHAPTER 2 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL 45 2.1 Components of a Digital Control System 46 2.2 The Sampling Operation and Signal Reconstruction 48 2.3 Open Loop Control Versus Closed Loop Control 63 2.4 Performance Specifications for Control Systems 67 2.5 Time Domain and S-domain Correlation of Signals 69 2.6 Transient Response Specifications: Selection of Pole Locations 70 2.7 Steady-State Response Specifications 74 2.8 Stability of Dynamic Systems 76 2.9 Experimental Determination of Frequency Response 78 2.10 The Root Locus Method 89 2.11 Correlation Between Time Domain and Frequency Domain Information 93 2.12 Basic Feedback Control Types 97 2.13 Translation of Analog Control to Digital Control 125 2.14 Problems 128 CHAPTER 3 MECHANISMS FOR MOTION TRANSMISSION 133 3.1 Introduction 133 3.2 Rotary to Rotary Motion Transmission Mechanisms 136 3.3 Rotary to Translational Motion Transmission Mechanisms 139 3.4 Cyclic Motion Transmission Mechanisms 143 3.5 Shaft Misalignments and Flexible Couplings 153 3.6 Actuator Sizing 154 3.7 Homogeneous Transformation Matrices 162 3.8 A Case Study: Automotive Transmission as a “Gear Reducer” 172 3.9 Problems 201 CHAPTER 4 MICROCONTROLLERS 207 4.1 Embedded Computers versus Non-Embedded Computers 207 4.2 Basic Computer Model 214 4.3 Microcontroller Hardware and Software: PIC 18F452 218 4.4 Interrupts 235 4.5 Problems 243 CHAPTER 5 ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS FOR MECHATRONIC SYSTEMS 245 5.1 Introduction 245 5.2 Basics of Linear Circuits 245 5.3 Equivalent Electrical Circuit Methods 249 5.4 Impedance 252 5.5 Semiconductor Electronic Devices 260 5.6 Operational Amplifiers 282 5.7 Digital Electronic Devices 308 5.8 Digital and Analog I/O and Their Computer Interface 314 5.9 D/A and A/D Converters and Their Computer Interface 318 5.10 Problems 324 CHAPTER 6 SENSORS 329 6.1 Introduction to Measurement Devices 329 6.2 Measurement Device Loading Errors 333 6.3 Wheatstone Bridge Circuit 335 6.4 Position Sensors 339 6.5 Velocity Sensors 362 6.6 Acceleration Sensors 365 6.7 Strain, Force, and Torque Sensors 372 6.8 Pressure Sensors 376 6.9 Temperature Sensors 381 6.10 Flow Rate Sensors 385 6.11 Humidity Sensors 393 6.12 Vision Systems 394 6.13 GPS: Global Positioning System 397 6.14 Problems 403 CHAPTER 7 ELECTROHYDRAULIC MOTION CONTROL SYSTEMS 407 7.1 Introduction 407 7.2 Fundamental Physical Principles 425 7.3 Hydraulic Pumps 437 7.4 Hydraulic Actuators: Hydraulic Cylinder and Rotary Motor 457 7.5 Hydraulic Valves 461 7.6 Sizing of Hydraulic Motion System Components 507 7.7 Hydraulic Motion Axis Natural Frequency and Bandwidth Limit 518 7.8 Linear Dynamic Model of a One-Axis Hydraulic Motion System 520 7.9 Nonlinear Dynamic Model of One-Axis Hydraulic Motion System 527 7.10 Example: Open Center Hydraulic System – Force and Speed Modulation Curves in Steady State 571 7.11 Example: Hydrostatic Transmissions 576 7.12 Current Trends in Electrohydraulics 586 7.13 Case Studies 589 7.14 Problems 593 CHAPTER 8 ELECTRIC ACTUATORS: MOTOR AND DRIVE TECHNOLOGY 603 8.1 Introduction 603 8.2 Energy Losses in Electric Motors 629 8.3 Solenoids 633 8.4 DC Servo Motors and Drives 640 8.5 AC Induction Motors and Drives 659 8.6 Step Motors 670 8.7 Linear Motors 681 8.8 DC Motor: Electromechanical Dynamic Model 683 8.9 Problems 691 CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS 695 9.1 Introduction 695 9.2 Hardware Components of PLCs 697 9.3 Programming of PLCs 705 9.4 PLC Control System Applications 709 9.5 PLC Application Example: Conveyor and Furnace Control 712 9.6 Problems 714 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMABLE MOTION CONTROL SYSTEMS 717 10.1 Introduction 717 10.2 Design Methodology for PMC Systems 722 10.3 Motion Controller Hardware and Software 723 10.4 Basic Single-Axis Motions 724 10.5 Coordinated Motion Control Methods 729 10.6 Coordinated Motion Applications 735 10.7 Problems 747 CHAPTER 11 LABORATORY EXPERIMENTS 749 11.1 Experiment 1: Basic Electrical Circuit Components and Kirchoff’s Voltage and Current Laws 749 11.2 Experiment 2: Transistor Operation: ON/OFF Mode and Linear Mode of Operation 754 11.3 Experiment 3: Passive First-Order RC Filters: Low Pass Filter and High Pass Filter 758 11.4 Experiment 4: Active First-Order Low Pass Filter with Op-Amps 762 11.5 Experiment 5: Schmitt Trigger With Variable Hysteresis using an Op-Amp Circuit 766 11.6 Experiment 6: Analog PID Control Using Op-Amps 770 11.7 Experiment 7: LED Control Using the PIC Microcontroller 775 11.8 Experiment 8: Force and Strain Measurement Using a Strain Gauge and PIC-ADC Interface 780 11.9 Experiment 9: Solenoid Control Using a Transistor and PIC Microcontroller 787 11.10 Experiment 10: Stepper Motor Motion Control Using a PIC Microcontroller 790 11.11 Experiment 11: DC Motor Speed Control Using PWM 794 11.12 Experiment 12: Closed Loop DC Motor Position Control 799 APPENDIX MATLAB®, SIMULINK®, STATEFLOW, AND AUTO-CODE GENERATION 805 A.1 MATLAB® Overview 805 A.1.1 Data in MATLAB® Environment 808 A.1.2 Program Flow Control Statements in MATLAB® 813 A.1.3 Functions in MATLAB®: M-script files and M-function files 815 A.1.4 Input and Output in MATLAB® 822 A.1.5 MATLAB® Toolboxes 831 A.1.6 Controller Design Functions: Transform Domain and State-Space Methods 832 A.2 Simulink® 836 A.2.1 Simulink® Block Examples 843 A.2.2 Simulink®S-Functions in C Language 852 A.3 Stateflow 856 A.3.1 Accessing Data and Functions from a Stateflow Chart 865 A.4 Auto Code Generation 876 REFERENCES 879 INDEX 883

    £82.60

  • Mechanical Properties and Performance of

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Mechanical Properties and Performance of

    Book SynopsisCeramic Engineering and Science Proceedings Volume 34, Issue 2 - Mechanical Properties and Performance of Engineering Ceramics and Composites VIIIA collection of 21 papers from The American Ceramic Society's 37th International Conference on Advanced Ceramics and Composites, held in Daytona Beach, Florida, January 27-February 1, 2013. This issue includes papers presented in Symposium 1 -Mechanical Behavior and Performance of Ceramics and Composites.Table of ContentsPreface ix Introduction xi CHARACTERIZATION AND MODELING OF CERAMIC MATRIX COMPOSITES Acoustic Emission and Electrical Resistivity Monitoring of SiC/SiC Composite Cyclic Behavior 3 Christopher R. Baker and Gregory N. Morscher Characterization of SiC/SiCN Ceramic Matrix Composites with Monazite Fiber Coating 11 Enrico Klatt, Klemens Kelm, Martin FrieG, Dietmar Koch, and Heinz Voggenreiter Fiber, Porosity and Weave Effects on Properties of Ceramic Matrix Composites 23 G. Ojard, J. Cuneo, I. Smyth, E. Prevost, Y. Gowayed, U. Santhosh, and A. Calomino Weave and Fiber Volume Effects on Durability of Ceramic Matrix Composites 33 G. Ojard, E. Prevost, U. Santhosh, R. Naik, and D. C. Jarmon Cooling Performance Tests of a CMC Nozzle with Annular Sector Cascade Rig 45 Kozo Nita, Yoji Okita, and Chiyuki Nakamata Study on Strength Prediction Model for Unidirectional Composites 57 Hongjian Zhang, Weidong Wen, Haitao Cui, Hui Yuan, and Jianfeng Xiao PROCESSING AND PROPERTIES OF FIBERS AND CERAMICS The Effect of the Addition of Ceria Stabilized Zirconia on the Creep of Mullite 69 D. Glymond, M. Vick, M.-J. Pan, F. Giuliani, and L. J. Vandeperre Microstructural Evolution of CVD Amorphous B-C Ceramics Heat Treated: Experimental Characterization and Atomistic Simulation 79 Camille Pallier, Georges Chollon, Patrick Weisbecker, Jean-Marc Leyssale, and F. Teyssandier Densification of SiC with AIN-Nd203 Sintering Additives 89 Laner Wu, Yong Jiang, Wenzhou Sun, Yuhong Chen, and Zhenkun Huang Solid-Solution of Nitrogen-Containing Rare Earth Aluminates R2AI03N (R=Nd and Sm) 95 Yong Jiang, Laner Wu, and Zhengkun Huang Microstructure and Properties of Reaction Bonded Metal Modified Ceramics 101 S. M. Salamone, M. K. Aghajanian, S. E. Horner, and J. Q. Zheng Investigation into the Effect of Common Ceramic Core Additives on the Crystallisation and Sintering of Amorphous Silica 111 Ben Taylor, Stewart T. Welch, and Stuart Blackburn Different Fibers Exposed to Temperatures Up to 1000° C 123 Henry A. Colorado, Clem Hiel, and Jenn-Ming Yang Heat Diffusivity Measurements on Ceramic Foams and Fibers with a Laser Spot and an IR Camera 137 G. L. Vignoles, C. Lorrette, G. Bresson, and R. Backov Towards a Multiscale Model of Thermally-Induced Microcracking in Porous Ceramics 145 Ray S. Fertig, III and Seth Nickerson Investigation on Reliability of High Alumina Refractories 155 Wenjie Yuan, Qingyou Zhu, Jun Li, Chengji Deng, and Hongxi Zhu Evaluation of Subcritical Crack Growth in Low Temperature Co-Fired Ceramics 161 Raul Bermejo, Peter Supancic, Clemens Krautgasser, and Robert Danzer Multilayer Ceramic Composite Armor Design and Impact Tests 173 Faruk Elaldi Compression Failure Analysis of Graphite Foam Core Based Sandwich Composite Constructions 179 Hooman Hosseini, Seyyed Reza Ghaffarian, Mohammad Teymouri, and Ali Reza Moeini Tribological Profile of Binderless Niobium Carbide 189 Mathias Woydt and Hardy Mohrbacher Tribological Properties of Alumina/Zirconia Composites with and without h-BN Phases 195 Liang Xue and Gary L. Doll Author Index 207

    £67.46

  • Advanced Ceramic Coatings and Materials for

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Advanced Ceramic Coatings and Materials for

    Book SynopsisCeramic Engineering and Science Proceedings Volume 34, Issue 3 - Advanced Ceramic Coatings and Materials for Extreme Environments IIIA collection of 12 papers from The American Ceramic Society's 37th International Conference on Advanced Ceramics and Composites, held in Daytona Beach, Florida, January 27-February 1, 2013. This issue includes papers presented in the Advanced Ceramic Coatings and Systems and Next Generation Technologies for Innovative Surface Coatingssymposia.Table of ContentsPreface vii Introduction ix Progress in EBC Development for Silicon-Based, Non-Oxide Ceramics 1C.A. Lewinsohn, H. Anderson, J. Johnston, and Dongming Zhu Fabrication of Slurry Based Y-Si-AI-0 Environmental Barrier Coating on the Porous Si3N4 Ceramics 9Yinchao Liu, Chao Wang, Xuefen Lu, Hongjie Wang Creep and Environmental Durability of Environmental Barrier Coatings and Ceramic Matrix Composites under Imposed Thermal Gradient Conditions 19Matthew Appleby, Gregory N. Morscher, and Dongming Zhu Dynamic Oblique Angle Deposition of Nanostructures for Energy Applications 31G.-C. Wang, I. Bhat, and T.-M. Lu Photoinduced Hydrophilicity and Photocatalytic Properties of Nb205 Thin Films 47Raquel Fiz, Linus Appel, and Sanjay Mathur Hard Nanocomposite Coatings: Thermal Stability, Protection of Substrate against Oxidation, Toughness and Resistance to Cracking 55J. Musil Preparation of Epitaxially Grown Cr-Si-N Thin Films by Pulsed Laser Deposition 67T. Endo, K. Suzuki, A. Sato, T. Suzuki, T. Nakayama, H. Suematsu, and K. Niihara Influence of Oxygen Content on the Hardness and Electrical Resistivity of Cr(N,0) Thin Films 77Aoi Sato, Toshiyuki Endo, Kazuma Suzuki, Tsuneo Suzuki, Tadachika Nakayama, Hisayuki Suematsu, and Koichi Niihara Nanocomposite MO-CU-N Coatings Deposited by Reactive Magnetron Sputtering Process with a Single Alloying Target 89Duck Hyeong Jung, Caroline Sunyong Lee, and Kyoung II Moon Customized Coating Systems for Products with Added Value from Development to High Volume Production 97T. Hosenfeldt, Y. Musayev, and Edgar Schulz A Study on the Improvement of the Service Life of Shaft-Bushing Tribo-Systems by Plasma Sulfur Nitrocarburing Process 105Kyoung II Moon, Hyun Jun Park, Hyoung Jun Kim, Jin Uk Kim, and Cheol Wong Byun Microstructural Characterisation of Porous Ti02 Ceramic Coatings Fabricated by Plasma Electrolytic Oxidation of Ti 117Po-Jen Chu, Aleksey Yerokhin, Allan Matthews, and Ju-Liang He Author Index 129

    £67.46

  • Ceramic Materials for Energy Applications III

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Ceramic Materials for Energy Applications III

    Book SynopsisCeramic Engineering and Science Proceedings Volume 34, Issue 9 - Ceramic Materials for Energy Applications III A collection of 15 papers from The American Ceramic Society''s 37th International Conference on Advanced Ceramics and Composites, held in Daytona Beach, Florida, January 27-February 1, 2013. This issue includes papers presented in Symposia 6 - Advanced Materials and Technologies for Rechargeable Energy Storage; Symposium 13 - Advanced Ceramics and Composites for Sustainable Nuclear Energy and Fusion Energy; Focused Session 4 - Advanced Processing for Photonics and Energy; and the Engineering Summit of the Americas session.Table of ContentsPreface vii Introduction ix ENGINEERING SUMMIT OF THE AMERICAS New Materials for Energy and Biomedical Applications 3 Alejandra Hortencia Miranda Gonzalez, Claudio Machado Junior, Bruna Andressa Bregadiolli, Natalia Coelho de Farias, Paulo Henrique Perlatti D'Alpino, and Carlos Frederico de Oliveira Graeff Ceramic Gas-Separation Membranes for Advanced Energy Applications 15 C. A. Lewinsohn, J. Chen, D. M. Taylor, P. A. Armstrong, L.L. Anderson, and M. F. Carolan ADVANCED MATERIALS AND TECHNOLOGIES FOR ENERGY GENERATION AND RECHARGEABLE ENERGY STORAGE Li-Ion Conducting Solid Electrolytes 27 A. Rost, J. Schilm, M. Kusnezoff, and A. Michaelis Sodium Iron Phosphate Na2FeP207 Glass-Ceramics for Sodium Ion Battery 33 Tsuyoshi Honma, Takuya Togashi, Noriko Ito, and Takayuki Komatsu Heterogeneous Manganese Oxide-Encased Carbon Nanocomposite Fibers for High Performance Pseudocapacitors 41 Qiang Li, Karen Lozano, Yinong Lü, and Yuanbing Mao The Effect of Geometric Factors on Sodium Conduction: A Comparison of Beta- and Beta"-Alumina 57 Emma Kennedy and Dunbar P. Birnie III ADVANCED CERAMIC MATERIALS AND PROCESSING FOR PHOTONICS AND ENERGY Effect of Porosity on the Efficiency of DSSC Produced by using Nano-Size Ti02 Powders 67 N. Bilgin, J. Park, and A. Ozturk Evaluation of Compression Characteristics for Composite- Antenna-Structures 79 Jinyul Kim, Dongseob Kim, Dongsik Shin, Weesang Park, and Woonbong Hwang Design and Fabrication of Smart-Skin Structures with a Spiral 87 Antenna Dongseob Kim, Jinyul Kim, and Woonbong Hwang ADVANCED CERAMICS AND COMPOSITES FOR SUSTAINABLE NUCLEAR ENERGY AND FUSION ENERGY Comparison of Probabilistic Failure Analysis for Hybrid Wound Composite Ceramic Assembly Tested by Various Methods 95 James G. Hemrick and Edgar Lara-Curzio Strength-Formulation Correlations in Magnesium Phosphate Cements for Nuclear Waste Encapsulation 107 W. Montague, M. Hayes, and L. J. Vandeperre Test Methods for Hoop Tensile Strength of Ceramic Composite Tubes for Light Water Nuclear Reactor Applications 119 Michael G. Jenkins and Jonathan A. Salem Test Methods for Flexural Strength of Ceramic Composite Tubes for Small Modular Reactor Applications 131 Michael G. Jenkins and Thomas L. Nguyen Effects of Size and Geometry on the Equibiaxial Flexural Test of Fine Grained Nuclear Graphite 141 Chunghao Shih, Yutai Katoh, and Takagi Takashi High Temperature Steam Corrosion of Cladding for Nuclear Applications: Experimental 149 Kevin M. McHugh, John E. Gamier, Sergey Rashkeev, Michael V. Glazoff, George W. Griffith, and Shannon M. Bragg-Sitton Author Index 161

    £67.46

  • Nanostructured Materials and Nanotechnology VII

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Nanostructured Materials and Nanotechnology VII

    Book SynopsisCeramic Engineering and Science Proceedings Volume 34, Issue 7 - Nanostructured Materials and Nanotechnology VII A collection of 15 papers from The American Ceramic Society''s 37th International Conference on Advanced Ceramics and Composites, held in Daytona Beach, Florida, January 27-February 1, 2013. This issue includes papers presented in the 7th International Symposium on Nanostructured Materials and Nanotechnology (Symposium 7) and Nanomaterials for Sensing Applications symposia (Focused Session 3).Table of ContentsPreface vii Introduction ix NANOSTRUCTURED MATERIALS AND NANOTECHNOLOGY Sol-Gel Approach to the Calcium Phosphate Nanocomposites 3Aldona Beganskiene, Zivile Stankeviciute, Milda Malakauskaite, Irma Bogdanoviciene, Valdek Mikli, Kaia Tonsuaadu, and Aivaras Kareiva Reinforcement Mechanisms in Alumina Toughened Zirconia Nanocomposites with Different Stabilizing Agents 15Sergio Rivera, Luis A. Diaz, Adolfo Fernandez, Ramon Torrecillas, and Jose S. Moya Synthesis and Characterization of Nanostructured Copper Oxide 23David Dodoo-Arhin, Matteo Leoni, and Paolo Scardi X-Ray Diffraction Study on the In-Situ Crystallization Kinetics in Electrospun PVP/Ti02 Nanofibers 35H. Albetran, A. Alsafwan, H. Haroosh, Y. Dong, and I. M. Low Metal-Catalyzed Growth of ZnO Nanowires 51Werner Mader, Heike Simon, Tobias Krekeler, and Gunnar Schaan Graphene-SnO2 Nanocomposites for Lithium-Ion Battery Anodes 67R. Muller and S. Mathur Cobalt-Manganese Spinel Oxides as Visible-Light-Driven Water Oxidation Catalysts 75Hongfei Liu, and Greta R. Patzke Eclipse Transparent Electrode and Applications 87Hulya Demiryont, Kenneth C. Shannon III, and Matthew Bratcher Plasma Enhanced CVD of Transparent and Conductive Tin Oxide Thin Films 99Trilok Singh, Thomas Fischer, Jai Singh, Sanjeev Kumar Gurram, and Sanjay Mathur Chemically Bonded Phosphate Ceramics Reinforced with Carbon Nanotubes 107James Wade, Jingjing Liu, and Houzheng Wu Hardness of Alumina/Silicon Carbide Nanocomposites at Various Silicon Carbide Volume Percentages 119James Wade and Houzheng Wu NANOMATERIALS FOR SENSING APPLICATIONS Self-Sustained NO2 GAS Sensor Operating at Room Temperatures Based on Solar Light activated p-NiO/n-Si Diode 133Alaa Eldin Gad and Sanjay Mathur Synthesis, Structural Studies of Some Lanthanide Complexes of the Mesogenic Schiff-Base, N,N"-di-(4'-Octadecyloxybenzoate)Salicylidene-I", 3"-Diamino-2"-Propanol 139Sanyucta Kumari Development of Single-, Few- and Multiple-Nanowire Gas-Sensor Two-Terminal Devices on Ceramic Substrates and Characterization by Impedance Spectroscopy 149Bonex Mwakikunga, Trilok Singh, Irina Giebelhaus, Thomas Fischer, Ashish Lepcha, Alaa Eldin Gad, Guido Faglia, and Sanjay Mathur Synthesis and Dispersion of Silica Nanowires for Biosensing Applications 157Praveen Kumar Sekhar and Kumar Subramaniyam Author Index 165

    £67.46

  • Advances in Solid Oxide Fuel Cells IX Volume 34

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Advances in Solid Oxide Fuel Cells IX Volume 34

    Book SynopsisCeramic Engineering and Science Proceedings Volume 34, Issue 4 - Advances in Solid Oxide Fuel Cells IX A collection of 13 papers from The American Ceramic Society''s 37th International Conference on Advanced Ceramics and Composites, held in Daytona Beach, Florida, January 27-February 1, 2013. This issue includes papers presented in Symposium 3 - 10th International Symposium on Solid Oxide Fuel Cells: Materials, Science, and Technology.Table of ContentsPreface vi i Introduction ix Development of a Portable Propane Driven 300 W SOFC-System 1 Andreas Lindermeir, Ralph-Uwe Dietrich, and Christian Szepanski SOFC-System for Highly Efficient Power Generation from Biogas 11 Andreas Lindermeir, Ralph-Uwe Dietrich, and Jana Oelze Development of Solid Oxide Fuel Cell Stack Modules for High Efficiency Power Generation 23 Hossein Ghezel-Ayagh The Development of Plasma Sprayed Metal-Supported Solid Oxide Fuel Cells at Institute of Nuclear Energy Research 31 Chun-Liang Chang, Chang-Sing Hwang, Chun-Huang Tsai, Sheng-Hui Nien, Chin-Ming Chuang, Shih-Wei Cheng, and Szu-Han Wu Development and Application of SOFC-MEA Technology at INER 41 Maw-Chwain Lee, Tai-Nan Lin, and Ruey-yi Lee Aqueous Processing Routes for New SOFC Materials 67 Maarten C Verbraeken, Mark Cassidy, and John T.S. Irvine Modification of Sintering Behavior of Ni Based Anode Material by Doping for Metal Supported-SOFC 77 Pradnyesh Satardekar, Dario Montinaro, and Vincenzo M. Sglavo Nickel Pattern Anodes for Studying SOFC Electrochemistry 89 H. C Patel, V. Venkataraman, and P. V. Aravind Assessment of Ba-^COo.9-yFeyNbo.103.5 for High Temperature Electrochemical Devices 95 Zhibin Yang, Tenglong Zhu, Shidong Song, Minfang Han, and Fanglin Chen Ionic Conductivity in Mullite and Mullite Type Compounds 103 C. H. Rüscher and F. Kiesel Protective Oxide Coatings for the High Temperature Protection of Metallic SOFC Components 115 Neil J. Kidner, Sergio Ibanez, Kellie Chenault, Kari Smith, and Matthew M. Seabaugh Viscous Sealing Glass Development for Solid Oxide Fuel Cells 123 Cheol Woon Kim, Jen Hsien Hsu, Casey Townsend, Joe Szabo, Ray Crouch, Rob Baird, and Richard K. Brow Propane Driven Hot Gas Ejector for Anode Off Gas Recycling in a SOFC-System 133 Andreas Lindermeir, Ralph-Uwe Dietrich, and Christoph Immisch Author Index 143

    £67.46

  • Advances in Bioceramics and Porous Ceramics VI

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Advances in Bioceramics and Porous Ceramics VI

    Book SynopsisCeramic Engineering and Science Proceedings Volume 34, Issue 6 - Advances in Bioceramics and Porous Ceramics VI A collection of 13 papers from The American Ceramic Society''s 37th International Conference on Advanced Ceramics and Composites, held in Daytona Beach, Florida, January 27-February 1, 2013. This issue includes papers presented in Symposium 5 - Next Generation Bioceramics and Biocomposites and Symposium 9 - Porous Ceramics: Novel Developments and Applications.Table of ContentsPreface vii Introduction ix BIOCERAMICS Ceramics for Human Health Challenges 3Larry L. Hench and Mike Fenn Apatite Coatings: Ion Substitution and Biological Properties 27Wei Xia, Carl Lindahl, Anders Palmquist, and Hakan Engqvist Production of Potassium Titanate Whisker Reinforced Dental Composites 35Derya Kapusuz, Jongee Park, and Abdullah Ozturk Tribological Behavior of Friction Couple: Metal/Ceramic (Used for Head of Total Hip Replacement) 45M. Fellah, M. Labaiz, 0. Assala, and A. lost Hydrothermal Conversion of Calcite Foam to Carbonate Apatite 59N. X. T. Tram, M. Maruta, K. Tsuru, S. Matsuya, and K. Ishikawa Bioactive Ceramic Implants Composed of Hollow Hydroxyapatite Micro-Spheres for Bone Regeneration 67M. N. Rahaman, H. Fu, W. Xiao, and Y. Liu Maturation of Brushite (CaHP04-2H20) and In Situ Crystallization of Brushite Micro-Granules 77Matthew A. Miller, Matthew R. Kendall, Manoj K. Jain, Preston R. Larson, Andrew S. Madden, and A. Cuneyt Tas Biomimetic Calcium Phosphate Synthesis by using Calcium Metal 93A. Cuneyt Tas Surface Modification of Sol-Gel-Derived 45S5 BioglassR for Incorporation in Polylactic Acid (PLA) 107Ehsan Rezabeigi, Paula M. Wood-Adams, and Robin A. L. Drew POROUS CERAMICS Dead-End Silicon Carbide Micro-Filters for Liquid Filtration 115Ronald Neufert, Malte Moeller, and Abhaya K. Bakshi Effects of Fe203 on Properties of Novel Heat Insulation Materials Synthesized by Molten Salt Method 127Chengji Deng, Jun Ding, Wenjie Yuan, Jun Li, and Hongxi Zhu Development of Alkali-Resistant Porous Glass Based on (69-x)Si02-25B203-6Na20-xZrSi04 System 133M. Hasanuzzaman and A. G. Olabi Use of Cellular Ceramic-Supported SrO as a Catalyst for the Synthesis of Biodiesel 145F. B. Bassetti, A. A. Morandim, and F. S. Ortega Author Index 157

    £67.46

  • Advanced Processing and Manufacturing

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Advanced Processing and Manufacturing

    Book SynopsisCeramic Engineering and Science Proceedings Volume 34, Issue 8 - Advanced Processing and Manufacturing Technologies for Structural and Multifunctional Materials VII A collection of 20 papers from The American Ceramic Society''s 37th International Conference on Advanced Ceramics and Composites, held in Daytona Beach, Florida, January 27-February 1, 2013. This issue includes papers presented in the 7th International Symposium on Advanced Processing and Manufacturing Technologies for Structural and Multifunctional Materials and Systems (Symposium 8).Table of ContentsPreface ix Introduction xi Creation of Surface Geometric Structures by Thermal Micro-Lines Patterning Techniques 1Soshu Kirihara, Satoko Tasaki, and Yusuke Itakura Magnetoelectric Properties of La-Modified BiFe03 Thin Films on Strontium Ruthenate (SrRu03) Buffered Layer 9Regina C. Deus, Cesar R. Foschini, Jose A. Varela, Elson Longo, and Alexandre Z. Simoes Properties of Pb(Zr,Ti)03/CoFe204/Pb(Zr,Ti)03 Layered Thin Films Prepared Via Chemical Solution Deposition 23Yoshikatsu Kawabata, Makoto Moriya, Wataru Sakamoto, and Toshinobu Yogo Intelligent Processes Enable New Products in the Field of Non-Oxide Ceramics 31Jens Eichler Fabricating Successful Ceramic Components using Development Carrier Systems 37Tom Standring, Bhupa Prajapati, Alex Cendrowicz, Paul Wilson, and Stuart Blackburn Optimized Shaping Process for Transparent Spinel Ceramic 49Alfred Kaiser, Thomas Hutzler, Andreas Krell, and Robert Kremer Combustion Synthesis (SHS) of Complex Ceramic Materials 57Jerzy Lis Wear and Reactivity Studies of Melt Infiltrated Ceramic Matrix Composite 69D. C. Jarmon and G. C. Ojard Fabrication and Properties of High Thermal Conductivity Silicon Nitride 79You Zhou, Hideki Hyuga, Tatsuki Ohji, and Kiyoshi Hirao Porous Silicon Carbide Derived from Polymer Blend 89Ken'ichiro Kita and Naoki Kondo Processing and Properties of Zirconia Toughened WC-Based Cermets 97I. Hussainova, N. Voltsihhin, M. E. Cura, and S-P. Hannula Mechanism of the Carbothermal Synthesis of MgAI204-SiC Refractory Composite Powders by Forsterite, Alumina and Carbon Black 105Hongxi Zhu, Hongjuan Duan, Wenjie Yuan, and Chengji Deng Joining of Alumina by Polycarbosilane and Siloxane Including Phenyl Groups 111Ken'ichiro Kita and Naoki Kondo Microwave Joining of Alumina using a Liquid Phase Sintered Alumina Insert* 123Naoki Kondo, Mikinori Hotta, Hideki Hyuga, Kiyoshi Hirao, and Hideki Kita Joining of Silicon Nitride Long Pipes without Insert Material by Local Heating Technique 129Mikinori Hotta, Naoki Kondo, Hideki Kita, and Tatsuki Ohji Interfacial Characterization of Diffusion-Bonded Monolithic and Fiber-Bonded Silicon Carbide Ceramics 133H. Tsuda, S. Mori, M. C. Halbig, and M. Singh Round Robin on Indentation Fracture Resistance of Silicon Carbide for Small Ceramic Products 143Hiroyuki Miyazaki, Yu-ichi Yoshizawa, and Kouichi Yasuda Numerical Analysis of Microstructural Fracture Behavior in Nano Composites under HVEM 151Hisashi Serizawa, Tamaki Shibayama, and Hidekazu Murakawa

    £67.46

  • Stirling Cycle Engines

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Stirling Cycle Engines

    Book SynopsisSome 200 years after the original invention, internal design of a Stirling engine has come to be considered a specialist task, calling for extensive experience and for access to sophisticated computer modelling. The low parts-count of the type is negated by the complexity of the gas processes by which heat is converted to work. Design is perceived as problematic largely because those interactions are neither intuitively evident, nor capable of being made visible by laboratory experiment. There can be little doubt that the situation stands in the way of wider application of this elegant concept. Stirling Cycle Engines re-visits the design challenge, doing so in three stages. Firstly, unrealistic expectations are dispelled: chasing the Carnot efficiency is a guarantee of disappointment, since the Stirling engine has no such pretentions. Secondly, no matter how complex the gas processes, they embody a degree of intrinsic similarity from engine to engine. Suitably exploiteTable of ContentsAbout the Author xi Foreword xiii Preface xvii Notation xix 1 Stirling myth – and Stirling reality 1 1.1 Expectation 1 1.2 Myth by myth 2 1.3 …and some heresy 7 1.4 Why this crusade? 7 2 R´eflexions sur le cicle de Carnot 9 2.1 Background 9 2.2 Carnot re-visited 10 2.3 Isothermal cylinder 11 2.4 Specimen solutions 14 2.5 ‘Realistic’ Carnot cycle 16 2.6 ‘Equivalent’ polytropic index 16 2.7 R´eflexions 17 3 What Carnot efficiency? 19 3.1 Epitaph to orthodoxy 19 3.2 Putting Carnot to work 19 3.3 Mean cycle temperature difference, εTx = T – Tw 20 3.4 Net internal loss by inference 21 3.5 Why no p-V diagram for the ‘ideal’ Stirling cycle? 23 3.6 The way forward 23 4 Equivalence conditions for volume variations 25 4.1 Kinematic configuration 25 4.2 ‘Additional’ dead space 27 4.3 Net swept volume 32 5 The optimum versus optimization 33 5.1 An engine from Turkey rocks the boat 33 5.2 …and an engine from Duxford 34 5.3 Schmidt on Schmidt 36 5.4 Crank-slider mechanism again 41 5.5 Implications for engine design in general 42 6 Steady-flow heat transfer correlations 45 6.1 Turbulent – or turbulent? 45 6.2 Eddy dispersion time 47 6.3 Contribution from ‘inverse modelling’ 48 6.4 Contribution from Scaling 50 6.5 What turbulence level? 52 7 A question of adiabaticity 55 7.1 Data 55 7.2 The Archibald test 55 7.3 A contribution from Newton 56 7.4 Variable-volume space 57 7.5 D´esax´e 59 7.6 Thermal diffusion – axi-symmetric case 60 7.7 Convection versus diffusion 61 7.8 Bridging the gap 61 7.9 Interim deductions 64 8 More adiabaticity 65 8.1 ‘Harmful’ dead space 65 8.2 ‘Equivalent’ steady-flow closed-cycle regenerative engine 66 8.3 ‘Equivalence’ 68 8.4 Simulated performance 68 8.5 Conclusions 70 8.6 Solution algorithm 71 9 Dynamic Similarity 73 9.1 Dynamic similarity 73 9.2 Numerical example 75 9.3 Corroboration 79 9.4 Transient response of regenerator matrix 80 9.5 Second-order effects 82 9.6 Application to reality 82 10 Intrinsic Similarity 83 10.1 Scaling and similarity 83 10.2 Scope 83 10.3 First steps 88 10.4 …without the computer 90 11 Getting started 97 11.1 Configuration 97 11.2 Slots versus tubes 98 11.3 The ‘equivalent’ slot 102 11.4 Thermal bottleneck 104 11.5 Available work lost – conventional arithmetic 107 12 FastTrack gas path design 109 12.1 Introduction 109 12.2 Scope 110 12.3 Numerical example 110 12.4 Interim comment 118 12.5 Rationale behind FastTrack 118 12.6 Alternative start point – GPU-3 charged with He 121 13 FlexiScale 129 13.1 FlexiScale? 129 13.2 Flow path dimensions 130 13.3 Operating conditions 133 13.4 Regenerator matrix 137 13.5 Rationale behind FlexiScale 137 14 ReScale 141 14.1 Introduction 141 14.2 Worked example step-by-step 141 14.3 Regenerator matrix 145 14.4 Rationale behind ReScale 145 15 Less steam, more traction – Stirling engine design without the hot air 149 15.1 Optimum heat exchanger 149 15.2 Algebraic development 150 15.3 Design sequence 153 15.4 Note of caution 159 16 Heat transfer correlations – from the horse’s mouth 163 16.1 The time has come 163 16.2 Application to design 166 16.3 Rationale behind correlation parameters REω and XQXE 167 17 Wire-mesh regenerator – ‘back of envelope’ sums 171 17.1 Status quo 171 17.2 Temperature swing 171 17.3 Aspects of flow design 173 17.4 A thumb-nail sketch of transient response 181 17.5 Wire diameter 184 17.6 More on intrinsic similarity 190 18 Son of Schmidt 199 18.1 Situations vacant 199 18.2 Analytical opportunities waiting to be explored 200 18.3 Heat exchange – arbitrary wall temperature gradient 201 18.4 Defining equations and discretization 205 18.5 Specimen implementation 206 18.6 Integration 208 18.7 Specimen temperature solutions 211 19 H2 versus He versus air 215 19.1 Conventional wisdom 215 19.2 Further enquiry 216 19.3 So, why air? 217 20 The ‘hot air’ engine 219 20.1 In praise of arithmetic 219 20.2 Reynolds number Re in the annular gap 222 20.3 Contact surface temperature in annular gap 223 20.4 Design parameter Ld¨Mg 225 20.5 Building a specification 226 20.6 Design step by step 228 20.7 Gas path dimensions 229 20.8 Caveat 234 21 Ultimate Lagrange formulation? 235 21.1 Why a new formulation? 235 21.2 Context 235 21.3 Choice of display 236 21.4 Assumptions 238 21.5 Outline computational strategy 240 21.6 Collision mechanics 240 21.7 Boundary and initial conditions 244 21.8 Further computational economies 244 21.9 ‘Ultimate Lagrange’? 245 Appendix 1 The reciprocating Carnot cycle 247 Appendix 2 Determination of V2 and V4 – polytropic processes 249 Appendix 3 Design charts 251 Appendix 4 Kinematics of lever-crank drive 257 References 261 Name Index 267 Subject Index 269

    £85.46

  • Hydrostatic Transmissions and Actuators

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Hydrostatic Transmissions and Actuators

    Book SynopsisHydrostatic Transmissions and Actuators takes a pedagogical approach and begins with an overview of the subject, providing basic definitions and introducing fundamental concepts.Table of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgements xvii About the Companion Website xix 1 Introduction to Power Transmission 1 1.1 Transmission Ratio 1 1.1.1 Generalities 1 1.1.2 Definition 3 1.1.3 Classification 3 1.2 Mechanical Transmissions 4 1.2.1 Gear Trains 4 1.2.2 Gearboxes 6 1.2.3 Efficiency 8 1.2.4 Continuously and Infinitely Variable Transmissions 11 1.3 Hydraulic Transmissions 15 1.4 Hydrostatic Transmissions 19 1.4.1 Operational Principles 19 1.4.2 Formal Definition of Hydrostatic Transmissions 32 1.4.3 Classification of Hydrostatic Transmissions 34 1.4.4 Efficiency Considerations 40 1.5 Hydromechanical Power-Split Transmissions 40 1.5.1 General Classification 41 1.5.2 Transmission Ratio 42 1.5.3 Lockup Point 44 1.5.4 Power Relations 44 1.6 Mechanical and Hydrostatic Actuators 51 1.6.1 Mechanical Actuators 51 1.6.2 Hydrostatic Actuators 52 1.6.3 Hydrostatic Actuation Versus Valve Control 53 1.6.4 Multiple Cylinder Actuators 55 Exercises 56 References 57 2 Fundamentals of Fluid Flows in Hydrostatic Transmissions 59 2.1 Fluid Properties 59 2.1.1 Viscosity 59 2.1.2 Compressibility 64 2.2 Fluid Flow in Hydraulic Circuits 79 2.2.1 Flow Regimes 79 2.2.2 Internal Flow in Conduits 81 2.2.3 Flow Through Orifices 85 2.2.4 Leakage Flow in Pumps and Motors 87 2.2.5 Other Loss Models 93 Exercises 94 References 96 3 Hydrostatic Pumps and Motors 98 3.1 Hydrostatic and Hydrodynamic Pumps and Motors 98 3.2 Hydrostatic Machine Output 102 3.2.1 Average Input–Output Relations 102 3.2.2 Instantaneous Pump Output 104 3.2.3 Instantaneous Motor Output 112 3.2.4 Further Efficiency Considerations 116 3.3 Hydrostatic Pump and Motor Types 117 3.3.1 Radial Piston Pumps and Motors 117 3.3.2 Axial Piston Pumps and Motors 119 3.3.3 Gear Pumps and Motors 128 3.3.4 Vane Pumps and Motors 130 3.3.5 Digital Displacement Pumps and Motors 131 3.4 Energy Losses at Steady-State Operation 135 3.4.1 Energy Balances 135 3.4.2 Overall Efficiencies 138 3.4.3 Simplified Efficiency Equations 138 3.4.4 Efficiency Relations 139 3.5 Modelling Pump and Motor Efficiencies 141 3.5.1 Performance Curves 141 3.5.2 Volumetric Efficiency Modelling 144 3.5.3 Overall Efficiency Modelling 154 3.5.4 Mechanical Efficiency 160 Exercises 162 References 164 4 Basic Hydrostatic Transmission Design 166 4.1 General Considerations 166 4.1.1 Output Speed Control 166 4.1.2 Transmission Losses 167 4.2 Hydrostatic Transmission Efficiency 168 4.2.1 Energy Balance 169 4.2.2 Conduit Efficiency 171 4.2.3 Minor Pressure Losses 173 4.2.4 Practical Application 176 4.3 Transmission Output 183 4.4 Steady-State Design Applications 184 4.4.1 Case Study 1. Fixed-Displacement Motor and Variable-Displacement Pump 185 4.4.2 Case Study 2. Fixed-Displacement Pump and Variable-Displacement Motor 192 4.5 External Leakages and Charge Circuit 198 4.6 Heat Losses and Cooling 201 4.6.1 Sizing of the Heat Exchanger 201 4.6.2 Loop Flushing 203 Exercises 204 References 205 5 Dynamic Analysis of Hydrostatic Transmissions 207 5.1 Introduction 207 5.1.1 Pressure Surges during Transients 208 5.1.2 Mechanical Vibrations and Noise 211 5.1.3 Natural Circuit Oscillations 214 5.1.4 Resonance and Beating 217 5.1.5 Summary 219 5.2 Modelling and Simulation 219 5.2.1 Basic Equations 220 5.2.2 Case Study 1. Purely Inertial Load with a Step Input 223 5.2.3 Case Study 2. Variable Pump Flow 231 Exercises 240 References 241 6 Hydrostatic Actuators 243 6.1 Introductory Concepts 243 6.1.1 Circuit Operational Quadrants 243 6.1.2 Energy Management 244 6.1.3 Cylinder Stiffness 245 6.1.4 Double-Rod and Single-Rod Actuators 245 6.2 Hydrostatic Actuator Circuits 247 6.2.1 Design 1. Dual-Pump, Open-Circuit, Displacement-Controlled Actuator 247 6.2.2 Design 2. Dual-Pump, Closed-Circuit, Displacement-Controlled Actuator 249 6.2.3 Design 3. Dual-Pump Electrohydrostatic Actuator with Accumulators 251 6.2.4 Design 4. Circuit with an Inline Hydraulic Transformer 253 6.2.5 Design 5. Single-Pump Circuit with a Directional Valve 257 6.2.6 Design 6. Single-Pump Circuit with Pilot-Operated Check Valves 260 6.2.7 Design 7. Single-Pump Circuit with Inline Check Valves 263 6.2.8 Design 8. Energy Storage Circuit 267 6.2.9 Design 9. Double-Rod Actuator 273 6.3 Common Pressure Rail and Hydraulic Transformers 275 Exercises 281 References 282 7 Dynamic Analysis of Hydrostatic Actuators 283 7.1 Introduction 283 7.2 Mathematical Model 284 7.2.1 Basic Equations 284 7.2.2 Cylinder Friction 288 7.2.3 Pilot-Operated Check Valves 294 7.3 Case Study 298 7.3.1 Determination of the Pump Flow Period 299 7.3.2 Numerical Simulation 300 Exercises 304 References 306 8 Practical Applications 307 8.1 Infinitely Variable Transmissions in Vehicles 307 8.2 Heavy Mobile Equipment 310 8.3 Hybrid Vehicles 313 8.3.1 Definition 315 8.3.2 Electric Hybrids 315 8.3.3 Hydraulic Hybrids 316 8.3.4 CPR-Based Hybrids 321 8.4 Wind Turbines 323 8.4.1 Asynchronous Generators 324 8.4.2 Synchronous Generators 326 8.4.3 General Aspects of Power Transmission in Wind Turbines 328 8.4.4 Hydrostatic Transmission in Wind Turbines 329 8.5 Wave Energy Extraction 331 8.6 Aeronautical Applications 334 References 336 Appendix A Hydraulic Symbols 339 Appendix B Mathematics Review 345 B.1 The Nabla Operator (∇) 345 B.2 Ordinary Differential Equations (ODEs) 346 B.2.1 General Aspects and Definitions for ODEs 347 B.2.2 The Laplace Transform Method 351 References 360 Appendix C Fluid Dynamics Equations 361 C.1 Introduction 361 C.2 Fluid Stresses and Distortion Rates 363 C.3 Differential Fluid Dynamics Equations 365 C.3.1 Conservation of Mass 365 C.3.2 Conservation of Momentum 367 C.3.3 Navier–Stokes Equations in Cylindrical Coordinates 370 C.4 Control Volume Analysis 371 C.4.1 The Reynolds Transport Theorem 371 C.4.2 Mass and Momentum Conservation 373 C.4.3 Conservation of Energy 375 References 378 Index 379

    £79.75

  • Aircraft Control Allocation

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Aircraft Control Allocation

    Book SynopsisAircraft Control Allocation Wayne Durham, Virginia Polytechnic Institute and State University, USA Kenneth A. Bordignon, Embry-Riddle Aeronautical University, USA Roger Beck, Dynamic Concepts, Inc.Trade Review"The book is a vital reference for researchers and practitioners working in aircraft control, as well as graduate students in aerospace engineering" Expofairs, Sept 2017Table of ContentsDedication xiii Series Preface xv Glossary xvii About the Companion Website xxiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Redundant Control Effectors 1 1.2 Overview 3 References 5 2 Aircraft Control 6 2.1 Flight Dynamics 6 2.1.1 Equations of Motion 6 2.1.2 Linearized Equations of Motion 10 2.2 Control 12 2.2.1 General 12 2.2.2 Aircraft Control Effectors 13 2.2.3 Aircraft Control Inceptors 17 2.3 Afterword 18 References 19 3 Control Laws 20 3.1 Flying Qualities 20 3.1.1 Requirements 21 3.1.2 Control Law Design to Satisfy Flying Qualities Requirements 21 3.2 Dynamic-inversion Control Laws 21 3.2.1 Basics 21 3.2.2 Types of Equations 22 3.2.3 The Controlled Equations 23 3.2.4 The Kinematic and Complementary Equations 25 3.3 Model-following Control Laws 27 3.4 ‘Conventional’ Control Laws 27 3.5 Afterword 28 References 29 4 The Problem 30 4.1 Control Effectiveness 30 4.2 Constraints 31 4.3 Control Allocation 31 4.3.1 The Control Allocation Problem 32 4.4 Afterword 32 References 33 5 The Geometry of Control Allocation 34 5.1 Admissible Controls 34 5.1.1 General 34 5.1.2 Objects 34 5.1.3 Intersection and Union 37 5.1.4 Convex Hull 39 5.2 Attainable Moments 39 5.3 The Two-moment Problem 43 5.3.1 Area Calculations 48 5.4 The Three-moment Problem 49 5.4.1 Determination of Φ3 49 5.4.2 Volume Calculations 56 5.5 Significance of the Maximum Set 58 5.5.1 As a Standard of Comparison of Different Methods 59 5.5.2 Maneuver Requirements 60 5.5.3 Control Failure Reconfiguration 62 5.6 Afterword 62 References 64 6 Solutions 65 6.1 On-line vs. Off-line Solutions 65 6.1.1 On-line Solutions 65 6.1.2 Off-line Solutions 65 6.2 Optimal vs. Non-optimal Solutions 66 6.2.1 Maximum Capabilities 66 6.2.2 Maximum Volume 66 6.2.3 Nearest to Preferred 66 6.2.4 Unattainable Moments 67 6.3 Preferred Solutions 68 6.4 Ganging 68 6.5 Generalized Inverses 70 6.5.1 The General Case, and the Significance of P 2 70 6.5.2 Tailored Generalized Inverses 73 6.5.3 ‘Best’ Generalized Inverse 74 6.5.4 Pseudo-inverses 75 6.5.5 Methods that Incorporate Generalized Inverses 77 6.6 Direct Allocation 80 6.6.1 The Direct Method for the Two-moment Problem 81 6.6.2 The Direct Method for the Three-moment Problem 82 6.7 Edge and Facet Searching 84 6.7.1 Two-dimensional Edge Searching 85 6.7.2 Three-dimensional Facet Searching 88 6.8 Banks’ Method 90 6.8.1 Finding the Original Three Vertices 92 6.8.2 Determining a New Vertex 93 6.8.3 Replacing an Old Vertex 93 6.8.4 Terminating the Algorithm 95 6.9 Linear Programming 95 6.9.1 Casting Control Allocation as a Linear Program 96 6.9.2 Simplex 99 6.10 Moments Attainable by Various Solution Methods 100 6.10.1 General Case (Three-moment Problem) 101 6.10.2 Generalized Inverses (Two- and Three-moment Problems) 102 6.11 Examples 111 6.11.1 Generalized Inverses 111 6.11.2 Direct Allocation 119 6.11.3 Edge and Facet Searching 122 6.11.4 Banks’ Method 128 6.11.5 Linear Programming 132 6.11.6 Convex-hull Volume Calculations 134 6.12 Afterword 137 References 137 7 Frame-wise Control Allocation 139 7.1 General 139 7.2 Path Dependency 141 7.2.1 Examples of Path Dependency 142 7.3 Global vs. Local Control Effectiveness 147 7.4 Restoring 149 7.4.1 The Augmented B matrix 150 7.4.2 Implementation 152 7.4.3 Chattering 153 7.4.4 Minimum-norm Restoring 154 8 Control Allocation and Flight Control System Design 161 8.1 Dynamic-inversion Desired Accelerations 161 8.1.1 The Desired Acceleration: ẋdes 161 8.1.2 Command and Regulator Examples 163 8.2 The Maximum Set and Control Law Design 168 8.2.1 In the Design Process 168 8.2.2 In a Mature Design 172 8.2.3 Non-optimal Example 174 References 177 9 Applications 178 9.1 Lessons Learned from the Design of the X-35 Flight Control System 178 9.1.1 Theory vs. Practice 178 9.2 Uses of Redundancy 179 9.2.1 Preferred Solutions 179 9.2.2 Resolving Path-dependency Issues 180 9.3 Design Constraints 180 9.3.1 Axis Prioritization 180 9.3.2 Structural Loads 182 9.3.3 Effector Bandwidth 183 9.3.4 Gain Limiting and Stability Margins 184 9.4 Failure Accommodation 184 References 185 A Linear Programming 186 A.1 Control Allocation as a Linear Program 187 A.1.1 Optimality for Attainable Commands 188 A.1.2 Optimality for Unattainable Commands 188 A.2 Standard Forms for Linear Programming Problems 193 A.2.1 Dealing with Negative Unknowns 194 A.2.2 Dealing with Inequality Constraints 195 A.2.3 Writing a Program for Control Allocation in Standard Form 197 A.2.4 Revised Standard Form with Upper Bound 199 A.3 Properties of Linear Program Solutions 201 A.3.1 Basic Solutions 202 A.3.2 Degenerate Basic Solutions 203 A.3.3 Basic Feasible Solutions 204 A.4 Allocating Feasible Commands 204 A.4.1 Minimizing Error to a Preferred Solution 205 A.4.2 Minimizing Maximum Errors 209 A.4.3 Optimizing Linear Secondary Objectives 212 A.5 Building a Control Allocator for Feasible and Infeasible Solutions 213 A.5.1 Dual Branch 214 A.5.2 Single-branch or Mixed Optimization 215 A.5.3 Reduced Program Size without Secondary Optimization 218 A.6 Solvers 219 A.6.1 Preprocessing 220 A.6.2 Solution Algorithms 221 A.6.3 Simplex Method 222 A.6.4 Initialization of the Simplex Algorithm 232 A.7 Afterword 234 References 235 B Flight Simulation 237 B.1 Introduction 237 B.2 Modifications 237 B.2.1 Three of the top-level blocks have been left almost completely unaltered 237 B.2.2 Minor modifications consist of the new Pilot and Sensors blocks 238 B.3 NDI_CLAW 238 B.3.1 NDI_CLAW/Rate Transition 238 B.3.2 NDI_CLAW/PILOT_Mod 238 B.3.3 NDI_CLAW/INPUT 239 B.3.4 NDI_CLAW/MissionManager 239 B.3.5 NDI_CLAW/DynamicInversionControl 240 References 246 C Annotated Bibliography 247 References 247 Index 277

    £86.36

  • Laser Surface Modification and Adhesion

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Laser Surface Modification and Adhesion

    7 in stock

    Book SynopsisThe book provides a unique overview on laser techniques and applications for the purpose of improving adhesion by altering surface chemistry and topography/morphology of the substrate.Table of ContentsPreface xv Part 1: Laser Surface Treatment/Modification to Enhance Adhesion 1 Nd:YAG Laser Surface Treatment of Various Materials to Enhance Adhesion 3 A. Buchman, M. Rotel and H. Dodiuk-Kenig 1.1 Introduction 4 1.2 Methodology 13 1.3 Experimental 13 1.4 Results 17 1.5 Conclusions 49 References 51 2 Effects of Excimer Laser Treatment on Self-Adhesion Strength of Some Commodity (PS, PP) and Engineering (ABS) Plastics 55 Erol Sancaktar, Hui Lu and Nongnard Sunthonpagasit 2.1 Introduction 56 2.2 Background and Literature Survey 56 2.3 Ultrasonic Welding of Thermoplastics 65 2.4 Experimental Procedures 71 2.5 Results and Discussion 74 2.6 Summary and Conclusions 94 References 97 3 Laser Surface Pre-Treatment of Carbon Fiber-Reinforced Plastics (CFRPs) for Adhesive Bonding 103 F. Fischer, S. Kreling and K. Dilger 3.1 Introduction 103 3.2 State-of-Research 105 3.3 Materials and Methods 110 3.4 Laser Sources and Principles 112 3.5 Results 121 3.6 Summary 134 References 135 4 Laser Surface Modification of Fibers for Improving Fiber/Resin Interfacial Interactions in Composites 139 Anil N. Netravali 4.1 Introduction 140 4.2 Excimer Laser Treatment of UHMWPE Fibers 143 4.3 Excimer Laser Treatment of Vectran Fibers 154 4.4 Excimer Laser Treatment of Aramid Fibers 159 4.5 Excimer Laser Treatment of Cellulose Fibers 160 4.6 Summary 161 References 162 5 Laser Surface Modification in Dentistry: Effect on the Adhesion of Restorative Materials 167 Regina Guenka Palma-Dibb, Juliana Jendiroba Faraoni-Romano and Walter Raucci-Neto 5.1 Introduction 167 5.2 Dental Structures 173 5.3 Adhesion of Restorative Materials 180 5.4 Laser Light Interaction with the Dental Substrate 186 5.5 Dental Structure Ablation and Influence on Bond Strength of Restorative Materials 190 5.6 Summary and Prospects 196 References 196 Part 2: Other Effects/Applications of Laser Surface Treatment 6 Fundamentals of Laser-Polymer Interactions and their Relevance to Polymer Metallization 205 Piotr Rytlewski 6.1 Introduction 205 6.2 Impact of Laser Radiation on a Polymeric Material 208 6.3 Laser Selection Criteria 215 6.4 Surface Modification of Polymeric Materials Below Ablation Threshold 220 6.5 Surface Modification of Polymeric Materials Above Ablation Threshold 233 6.6 Application of Lasers to Polymer Metallization 241 6.7 Summary 251 Acknowledgement 252 References 252 7 Laser Patterning of Silanized Carbon/Polymer Bipolar Plates with Tailored Wettability for Fuel Cell Applications 263 Martin Schade, Steffen Franzka, Anja Schr”ter, Franco Cappuccio, Volker Peinecke, Angelika Heinzel and Nils Hartmann 7.1 Introduction 264 7.2 Silane-based Coatings 269 7.3 Laser Processing of Silane-based Coatings 271 7.4 Fabrication and Plasma Activation of Bipolar Plates 272 7.5 Silanization of Bipolar Plates 276 7.6 Laser Processing of Bipolar Plates 278 7.7 Summary 282 7.8 Prospects 283 Acknowledgments 283 References 284 8 Predominant and Generic Parameters Governing the Wettability Characteristics of Selected Laser-modified Engineering Materials 289 Jonathan Lawrence, David Waugh and Hao Liang 8.1 Introduction 290 8.2 Modification of Wettability Characteristics Using Laser Beams 291 8.3 Laser Wettability Characteristics Modification of Selected Ceramics 296 8.4 Laser Wettability Characteristics Modification of Selected Metals 307 8.5 Laser Wettability Characteristics Modification of a Selected Polymer 316 8.6 Summary and Conclusions 329 References 331 9 Laser Surface Engineering of Polymeric Materials and the Effects on Wettability Characteristics 337 D.G. Waugh, D. Avdic, K.J. Woodham and J. Lawrence 9.1 Introduction 337 9.2 Wettability Characteristics 338 9.3 State-of-the-Art Surface Engineering Techniques 345 9.4 Summary 366 References 367 10 Water Adhesion to Laser-Treated Surfaces 377 Athanasios Milionis, Despina Fragouli, Ilker S. Bayer and Athanassia Athanassiou 10.1 Introduction 377 10.2 Materials, Fabrication Approaches and Results 381 10.3 Applications 395 10.4 Prospects 404 10.5 Summary 406 Acknowledgement 406 References 407

    7 in stock

    £157.45

  • ElectromagnetoMechanics of Material Systems and

    John Wiley & Sons Inc ElectromagnetoMechanics of Material Systems and

    4 in stock

    Book SynopsisElectromagneto-Mechanics of Material Systems and Structures Electromagneto-Mechanics of Material Systems and Structures Written by a leading expert, this book is a comprehensive introduction to the fundamentals and the state of the art in the electromagneto-mechanics of adaptive materials. Its varied topic range includes an overview on how electric, magnetic, and deformation fields interact with each other in the presence of advanced materials systems, such as electric conductors, dielectrics, ferromagnets, among others. Within this context, the author considers for each material system specific phenomena like vibrations, wave propagation, fracture, and fatigue. Readers will also gain a thorough understanding of applications in the electronics and nuclear energy industries, as well as in smart materials and MEMS. Covers a wide and varied range of subject areas, spanning theoretical, experimental, computational studies as well as industrial applicationsFeatures extensive applications in the electronics, nuclear engineering, smart materials and MEMS industriesTakes the reader from fundamental concepts, applied research, applications through to emerging technologies Electromagneto-Mechanics of Material Systems and Structures is an all-in-one reference for advanced/graduate students in mechanical and electrical engineering, as well as materials science. It also serves as a handy refresher guide for engineers in related areas such as aeronautical and civil engineering.Table of ContentsAbout the Author ix Preface xi Acknowledgments xiii 1 Introduction 1 References 2 2 Conducting Material Systems and Structures 5 2.1 Basic Equations of Dynamic Magnetoelasticity 5 2.2 Magnetoelastic Plate Vibrations and Waves 7 2.2.1 Classical Plate Bending Theory 9 2.2.2 Mindlin’s Theory of Plate Bending 13 2.2.3 Classical Plate Bending Solutions 16 2.2.4 Mindlin Plate Bending Solutions 23 2.2.5 Plane Strain Plate Solutions 26 2.3 Dynamic Magnetoelastic Crack Mechanics 32 2.4 Cracked Materials Under Electromagnetic Force 40 2.5 Summary 45 References 45 3 Dielectric/Ferroelectric Material Systems and Structures 47 Part 3.1 Dielectrics 47 3.1 Basic Equations of Electroelasticity 48 3.2 Static Electroelastic Crack Mechanics 49 3.2.1 Infinite Dielectric Materials 49 3.2.2 Dielectric Strip 57 3.3 Electroelastic Vibrations and Waves 60 3.4 Dynamic Electroelastic Crack Mechanics 68 3.5 Summary 72 Part 3.2 Piezoelectricity 72 3.6 Piezomechanics and Basic Equations 73 3.6.1 Linear Theory 73 3.6.2 Model of Polarization Switching 77 3.6.3 Model of Domain Wall Motion 80 3.6.4 Classical Lamination Theory 82 3.7 Bending of Piezoelectric Laminates 90 3.7.1 Bimorphs 90 3.7.2 Functionally Graded Bimorphs 100 3.7.3 Laminated Plates 111 3.8 Electromechanical Field Concentrations 113 3.8.1 Laminates 113 3.8.2 Disk Composites 123 3.8.3 Fiber Composites 126 3.8.4 MEMS Mirrors 136 3.9 Cryogenic and High-Temperature Electromechanical Responses 140 3.9.1 Cryogenic Electromechanical Response 140 3.9.2 High-Temperature Electromechanical Response 147 3.10 Electric Fracture and Fatigue 149 3.10.1 Fracture Mechanics Parameters 150 3.10.2 Cracked Rectangular Piezoelectric Material 173 3.10.3 Indentation Fracture Test 185 3.10.4 Modified Small Punch Test 189 3.10.5 Single-Edge Precracked Beam Test 193 3.10.6 Double Torsion Test 201 3.10.7 Fatigue of SEPB Specimens 203 3.11 Summary 212 References 213 4 Ferromagnetic Material Systems and Structures 219 Part 4.1 Ferromagnetics 219 4.1 Basic Equations of Magnetoelasticity 220 4.1.1 Soft Ferromagnetic Materials 220 4.1.2 Magnetically Saturated Materials 221 4.1.3 Electromagnetic Materials 222 4.2 Magnetoelastic Instability 224 4.2.1 Buckling of Soft Ferromagnetic Material 225 4.2.2 Buckling of Magnetically Saturated Material 228 4.2.3 Bending of Soft Ferromagnetic Material 231 4.3 Magnetoelastic Vibrations and Waves 233 4.3.1 Vibrations and Waves of Soft Ferromagnetic Material 233 4.3.2 Vibrations and Waves of Magnetically Saturated Material 243 4.4 Magnetic Moment Intensity Factor 250 4.4.1 Simply Supported Plate Under Static Bending 251 4.4.2 Fixed-End Plate Under Static Bending 252 4.4.3 Infinite Plate Under Dynamic Bending 255 4.5 Tensile Fracture and Fatigue 256 4.5.1 Cracked Rectangular Soft Ferromagnetic Material 257 4.5.2 Fracture Test 261 4.5.3 Fatigue Crack Growth Test 263 4.6 Summary 265 Part 4.2 Magnetostriction 265 4.7 Basic Equations of Magnetostriction 265 4.8 Nonlinear Magneto-Mechanical Response 267 4.8.1 Terfenol-D/Metal Laminates 267 4.8.2 Terfenol-D/PZT Laminates 270 4.9 Magnetoelectric Response 272 4.10 Summary 273 References 273 Index 277

    4 in stock

    £124.15

  • Fundamentals of Biophysics

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Fundamentals of Biophysics

    Book SynopsisBiophysics is a science that comprises theoretical plotting and models based on contemporary physicochemical conceptions. They mirror physical specificity of the molecular organization and elementary processes in living organisms, which in their turn form the molecular basis of biological phenomena. Presentation of a complete course in biophysics requires vast biological material as well as additional involvement of state-of-the-art concepts in physics, chemistry and mathematics. This is essential for the students to perceive the specific nature and peculiarity of molecular biological processes and see how this specificity is displayed in biological systems. This is the essence of the up-to-date biophysical approach to the analysis of biological processes. Fundamentals of Biophysics offers a complete, thorough coverage of the material in a straightforward and no-nonsense format, offering a new and unique approach to the material that presents the appropriate topics without extraneouTable of ContentsPreface vii1 Dynamic Properties of Biological Processes 12 Types of Dynamic Behavior of Biological Systems 173 Kinetics of Enzyme Processes 354 Distributed Biological Systems. Chaotic Processes 455 Mathematical Models in Ecology 616 Thermodynamics of Irreversible Processes in Biological Systems Near Equilibrium 777 Thermodynamics of Systems Far from Equilibrium 938 Physicochemical Principles of Biopolymer Structure 1019 Intramolecular Dynamics of Proteins 12110 Physical Models of Protein Dynamic Mobility 13311 Energy Migration and Electron Transport in Biological Structures 14112 Mechanisms of Enzyme Catalysis 15113 Physicochemical Features of Biological Membranes. Ionic Equilibria 15714 Passive Transport of Substances Across Membranes 17115 Channels and Carriers. Active Transport 17916 Transport of Ions in Excitable Membranes 18517 Primary Processes of Energy Transformation in Photosynthesis 19118 Energy Transformation in Biological Membranes 199Further Reading 207Index 209

    £152.95

  • Microsystem Dynamics

    Wiley-Blackwell Microsystem Dynamics

    Book Synopsis

    £86.36

  • Aircraft Control and Simulation

    John Wiley and Sons Ltd Aircraft Control and Simulation

    Book SynopsisGet a complete understanding of aircraft control and simulation Aircraft Control and Simulation: Dynamics, Controls Design, and Autonomous Systems, Third Edition is a comprehensive guide to aircraft control and simulation. This updated text covers flight control systems, flight dynamics, aircraft modeling, and flight simulation from both classical design and modern perspectives, as well as two new chapters on the modeling, simulation, and adaptive control of unmanned aerial vehicles. With detailed examples, including relevant MATLAB calculations and FORTRAN codes, this approachable yet detailed reference also provides access to supplementary materials, including chapter problems and an instructor''s solution manual. Aircraft control, as a subject area, combines an understanding of aerodynamics with knowledge of the physical systems of an aircraft. The ability to analyze the performance of an aircraft both in the real world and in computer-simulated flight is essentiTrade ReviewThe book retains its original chapter subject skeleton with the titles slightly changed and as mentioned has two new chapters added, in total it is some 150 pages longer than the original. This is not however a simple graft of new material onto the original book. Many of the chapters have been rewritten so that even where much the same material is covered, it is more detailed and augmented, whilst at the same time maintaining a consistent uniform style across the whole book....In conclusion this new edition is a significant update of a popular text...(The Aeronautical Journal- January 2017)Table of ContentsPreface xi 1 The Kinematics and Dynamics of Aircraft Motion 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Vector Operations 3 1.3 Matrix Operations on Vector Coordinates 7 1.4 Rotational Kinematics 16 1.5 Translational Kinematics 20 1.6 Geodesy, Coordinate Systems, Gravity 23 1.7 Rigid-Body Dynamics 34 1.8 Advanced Topics 44 References 58 Problems 59 2 Modeling the Aircraft 63 2.1 Introduction 63 2.2 Basic Aerodynamics 64 2.3 Aircraft Forces And Moments 75 2.4 Static Analysis 101 2.5 The Nonlinear Aircraft Model 108 2.6 Linear Models And The Stability Derivatives 116 2.7 Summary 137 References 138 Problems 139 3 Modeling, Design, and Simulation Tools 142 3.1 Introduction 142 3.2 State-Space Models 144 3.3 Transfer Function Models 155 3.4 Numerical Solution of The State Equations 170 3.5 Aircraft Models For Simulation 179 3.6 Steady-State Flight 185 3.7 Numerical Linearization 199 3.8 Aircraft Dynamic Behavior 205 3.9 Feedback Control 213 3.10 Summary 241 References 241 Problems 243 4 Aircraft Dynamics and Classical Control Design 250 4.1 Introduction 250 4.2 Aircraft Rigid-Body Modes 257 4.3 The Handling-Qualities Requirements 274 4.4 Stability Augmentation 287 4.5 Control Augmentation Systems 303 4.6 Autopilots 322 4.7 Nonlinear Simulation 344 4.8 Summary 371 References 372 Problems 374 5 Modern Design Techniques 377 5.1 Introduction 377 5.2 Assignment of Closed-Loop Dynamics 381 5.3 Linear Quadratic Regulator With Output Feedback 397 5.4 Tracking A Command 413 5.5 Modifying The Performance Index 428 5.6 Model-Following Design 455 5.7 Linear Quadratic Design with Full State Feedback 470 5.8 Dynamic Inversion Design 477 5.9 Summary 492 References 492 Problems 495 6 Robustness and Multivariable Frequency-Domain Techniques 500 6.1 Introduction 500 6.2 Multivariable Frequency-Domain Analysis 502 6.3 Robust Output-Feedback Design 525 6.4 Observers and The Kalman Filter 529 6.5 Linear Quadratic Gaussian/Loop Transfer Recovery 554 6.6 Summary 577 References 578 Problems 580 7 Digital Control 584 7.1 Introduction 584 7.2 Simulation of Digital Controllers 585 7.3 Discretization of Continuous Controllers 588 7.4 Modified Continuous Design 598 7.5 Implementation Considerations 611 7.6 Summary 619 References 620 Problems 620 8 Modeling and Simulation of Miniature Aerial Vehicles 623 8.1 Introduction 623 8.2 Propeller/Rotor Forces and Moments 630 8.3 Modeling Rotor Flapping 640 8.4 Motor Modeling 645 8.5 Small Aerobatic Airplane Model 648 8.6 Quadrotor Model 654 8.7 Small Helicopter Model 655 8.8 Summary 660 References 661 Problems 661 9 Adaptive Control with Application to Miniature Aerial Vehicles 664 9.1 Introduction 664 9.2 Model Reference Adaptive Control Based On Dynamic Inversion 665 9.3 Neural Network Adaptive Control 668 9.4 Limited Authority Adaptive Control 674 9.5 Neural Network Adaptive Control Example 680 9.6 Summary 709 References 709 Problems 711 Appendix A F-16 Model 714 Appendix B Software 723 Index 733

    £119.65

  • Carrier Transport in Nanoscale MOS Transistors

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Carrier Transport in Nanoscale MOS Transistors

    10 in stock

    Book SynopsisA comprehensive advanced level examination of the transport theory of nanoscale devices Provides advanced level material of electron transport in nanoscale devices from basic principles of quantum mechanics through to advanced theory and various numerical techniques for electron transportCombines several up-to-date theoretical and numerical approaches in a unified manner, such as Wigner-Boltzmann equation, the recent progress of carrier transport research for nanoscale MOS transistors, and quantum correction approximationsThe authors approach the subject in a logical and systematic way, reflecting their extensive teaching and research backgroundsTable of ContentsPreface ix Acknowledgements xi 1 Emerging Technologies 1 1.1 Moore's Law and the Power Crisis 1 1.2 Novel Device Architectures 2 1.3 High Mobility Channel Materials 5 1.4 Two-Dimensional (2-D) Materials 7 1.5 Atomistic Modeling 8 2 First-principles calculations for Si nanostructures 12 2.1 Band structure calculations 12 2.1.1 Si ultrathin-body structures 12 2.1.2 Si nanowires 17 2.1.3 Strain effects on band structures: From bulk to nanowire 20 2.2 Tunneling current calculations through Si/SiO2/Si structures 31 2.2.1 Atomic models of Si (001)/SiO2 /Si (001) structures 32 2.2.2 Current-voltage characteristics 33 2.2.3 SiO2 thickness dependences 35 3 Quasi-ballistic Transport in Si Nanoscale MOSFETs 41 3.1 A picture of quasi-ballistic transport simulated using quantum-corrected Monte Carlo simulation 41 3.1.1 Device structure and simulation method 42 3.1.2 Scattering rates for 3-D electron gas 44 3.1.3 Ballistic transport limit 46 3.1.4 Quasi-ballistic transport 50 3.1.5 Role of elastic and inelastic phonon scattering 51 3.2 Multi-sub-band Monte Carlo simulation considering quantum confinement in inversion layers 55 3.2.1 Scattering Rates for 2-D Electron Gas 56 3.2.2 Increase in Dac for SOI MOSFETs 58 3.2.3 Simulated electron mobilities in bulk Si and SOI MOSFETs 59 3.2.4 Electrical characteristics of Si DG-MOSFETs 61 3.3 Extraction of quasi-ballistic transport parameters in Si DG-MOSFETs 64 3.3.1 Backscattering coefficient 64 3.3.2 Current drive 66 3.3.3 Gate and drain bias dependences 67 3.4 Quasi-ballistic transport in Si junctionless transistors 69 3.4.1 Device structure and simulation conditions 70 3.4.2 Influence of SR scattering 71 3.4.3 Influence of II scattering 74 3.4.4 Backscattering coefficient 75 3.5 Quasi-ballistic transport in GAA-Si nanowire MOSFETs 76 3.5.1 Device structure and 3DMSB-MC method 76 3.5.2 Scattering rates for 1-D electron gas 77 3.5.3 ID-VG characteristics and backscattering coefficient 79 4 Phonon Transport in Si Nanostructures 85 4.1 Monte Carlo simulation method 87 4.1.1 Phonon dispersion model 87 4.1.2 Particle simulation of phonon transport 88 4.1.3 Free flight and scattering 89 4.2 Simulation of thermal conductivity 91 4.2.1 Thermal conductivity of bulk silicon 91 4.2.2 Thermal conductivity of silicon thin films 94 4.2.3 Thermal conductivity of silicon nanowires 98 4.2.4 Discussion on Boundary scattering effect 100 4.3 Simulation of heat conduction in devices 102 4.3.1 Simulation method 102 4.3.2 Simple 1-D structure 103 4.3.3 FinFET structure 106 5 Carrier Transport in High-mobility MOSFETs 112 5.1 Quantum-corrected MC Simulation of High-mobility MOSFETs 112 5.1.1 Device Structure and Band Structures of Materials 112 5.1.2 Band Parameters of Si, Ge, and III-V Semiconductors 114 5.1.3 Polar-optical Phonon (POP) Scattering in III-V Semiconductors 115 5.1.4 Advantage of UTB Structure 116 5.1.5 Drive Current of III-V, Ge and Si n-MOSFETs 119 5.2 Source-drain Direct Tunneling in Ultrascaled MOSFETs 124 5.3 Wigner Monte Carlo (WMC) Method 125 5.3.1 Wigner Transport Formalism 126 5.3.2 Relation with Quantum-corrected MC Method 129 5.3.3 WMC Algorithm 131 5.3.4 Description of Higher-order Quantized Subbands 133 5.3.5 Application to Resonant-tunneling Diode 133 5.4 Quantum Transport Simulation of III-V n-MOSFETs with Multi-subband WMC (MSB-WMC) Method 138 5.4.1 Device Structure 138 5.4.2 POP Scattering Rate for 2-D Electron Gas 139 5.4.3 ID-VG Characteristics for InGaAs DG-MOSFETs 139 5.4.4 Channel Length Dependence of SDT Leakage Current 143 5.4.5 Effective Mass Dependence of Subthreshold Current Properties 144 6 Atomistic Simulations of Si, Ge and III-V Nanowire MOSFETs 151 6.1 Phonon-limited electron mobility in Si nanowires 151 6.1.1 Band structure calculations 152 6.1.2 Electron-phonon interaction 161 6.1.3 Electron mobility 162 6.2 Comparison of phonon-limited electron mobilities between Si and Ge nanowires 168 6.3 Ballistic performances of Si and InAs nanowire MOSFETs 173 6.3.1 Band structures 174 6.3.2 Top-of-the-barrier model 174 6.3.3 ID-VG characteristics 177 6.3.4 Quantum capacitances 178 6.3.5 Power-delay-product 179 6.4 Ballistic performances of InSb, InAs, and GaSb nanowire MOSFETs 181 6.4.1 Band structures 182 6.4.2 ID-VG characteristics 182 6.4.3 Power-delay-product 186 Appendix A: Atomistic Poisson equation 187 Appendix B: Analytical expressions of electron-phonon interaction Hamiltonian matrices 188 7 2-D Materials and Devices 191 7.1 2-D Materials 191 7.1.1 Fundamental Properties of Graphene, Silicene and Germanene 192 7.1.2 Features of 2-D Materials as an FET Channel 197 7.2 Graphene Nanostructures with a Bandgap 198 7.2.1 Armchair-edged Graphene Nanoribbons (A-GNRs) 199 7.2.2 Relaxation Effects of Edge Atoms 203 7.2.3 Electrical Properties of A-GNR-FETs Under Ballistic Transport 205 7.2.4 Bilayer Graphenes (BLGs) 209 7.2.5 Graphene Nanomeshes (GNMs) 214 7.3 Influence of Bandgap Opening on Ballistic Electron Transport in BLG and A-GNR-MOSFETs 215 7.3.1 Small Bandgap Regime 217 7.3.2 Large Bandgap Regime 219 7.4 Silicene, Germanene and Graphene Nanoribbons 221 7.4.1 Bandgap vs Ribbon Width 222 7.4.2 Comparison of Band Structures 222 7.5 Ballistic MOSFETs with Silicene, Germanene and Graphene nanoribbons 223 7.5.1 ID-VG Characteristics 223 7.5.2 Quantum Capacitances 224 7.5.3 Channel Charge Density and Average Electron Velocity 225 7.5.4 Source-drain Direct Tunneling (SDT) 226 7.6 Electron Mobility Calculation for Graphene on Substrates 228 7.6.1 Band Structure 229 7.6.2 Scattering Mechanisms 229 7.6.3 Carrier Degeneracy 231 7.6.4 Electron Mobility Considering Surface Optical Phonon Scattering of Substrates 232 7.6.5 Electron Mobility Considering Charged Impurity Scattering 234 7.7 Germanane MOSFETs 236 7.7.1 Atomic Model for Germanane Nanoribbon Structure 237 7.7.2 Band Structure and Electron Effective Mass 238 7.7.3 Electron Mobility 240 Appendix A: Density-of-states for Carriers in Graphene 242 References 242 Index 247

    10 in stock

    £104.45

  • Analytical Routes to Chaos in Nonlinear

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Analytical Routes to Chaos in Nonlinear

    Book SynopsisNonlinear problems are of interest to engineers, physicists and mathematicians and many other scientists because most systems are inherently nonlinear in nature. As nonlinear equations are difficult to solve, nonlinear systems are commonly approximated by linear equations.Table of ContentsPreface ix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Analytical Methods 1 1.1.1 Lagrange Standard Form 1 1.1.2 Perturbation Methods 2 1.1.3 Method of Averaging 5 1.1.4 Generalized Harmonic Balance 8 1.2 Book Layout 24 2 Bifurcation Trees in Duffing Oscillators 25 2.1 Analytical Solutions 25 2.2 Period-1 Motions to Chaos 32 2.2.1 Period-1 Motions 33 2.2.2 Period-1 to Period-4 Motions 35 2.2.3 Numerical Simulations 52 2.3 Period-3 Motions to Chaos 57 2.3.1 Independent, Symmetric Period-3 Motions 57 2.3.2 Asymmetric Period-3 Motions 64 2.3.3 Period-3 to Period-6 Motions 71 2.3.4 Numerical Illustrations 82 3 Self-Excited Nonlinear Oscillators 87 3.1 van del Pol Oscillators 87 3.1.1 Analytical Solutions 87 3.1.2 Frequency-Amplitude Characteristics 97 3.1.3 Numerical Illustrations 110 3.2 van del Pol-Duffing Oscillators 114 3.2.1 Finite Fourier Series Solutions 114 3.2.2 Analytical Predictions 130 3.2.3 Numerical Illustrations 143 4 Parametric Nonlinear Oscillators 151 4.1 Parametric, Quadratic Nonlinear Oscillators 151 4.1.1 Analytical Solutions 151 4.1.2 Analytical Routes to Chaos 156 4.1.3 Numerical Simulations 169 4.2 Parametric Duffing Oscillators 186 4.2.1 Formulations 186 4.2.2 Parametric Hardening Duffing Oscillators 194 5 Nonlinear Jeffcott Rotor Systems 209 5.1 Analytical Periodic Motions 209 5.2 Frequency-Amplitude Characteristics 225 5.2.1 Period-1 Motions 226 5.2.2 Analytical Bifurcation Trees 231 5.2.3 Independent Period-5 Motion 239 5.3 Numerical Simulations 246 References 261 Index 265

    £98.06

  • Internal Combustion Processes of Liquid Rocket

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Internal Combustion Processes of Liquid Rocket

    10 in stock

    Book SynopsisThis book concentrates on modeling and numerical simulations of combustion in liquid rocket engines, covering liquid propellant atomization, evaporation of liquid droplets, turbulent flows, turbulent combustion, heat transfer, and combustion instability. It presents some state of the art models and numerical methodologies in this area. The book can be categorized into two parts. Part 1 describes the modeling for each subtopic of the combustion process in the liquid rocket engines. Part 2 presents detailed numerical methodology and several representative applications in simulations of rocket engine combustion.Table of ContentsPreface x 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Basic Configuration of Liquid Rocket Engines 2 1.1.1 Propellant Feed System 2 1.1.2 Thrust Chamber 6 1.2 Internal Combustion Processes of Liquid Rocket Engines 13 1.2.1 Start and Shutdown 13 1.2.2 Combustion Process 15 1.2.3 Performance Parameters in Working Process 18 1.3 Characteristics and Development History of Numerical Simulation of the Combustion Process in Liquid Rocket Engines 19 1.3.1 Benefits of Numerical Simulation of the Combustion Process in Liquid Rocket Engines 19 1.3.2 Main Contents of Numerical Simulations of Liquid Rocket Engine Operating Process 19 1.3.3 Development of Numerical Simulations of Combustion Process in Liquid Rocket Engines 21 1.4 Governing Equations of Chemical Fluid Dynamics 22 1.5 Outline of this Book 24 References 25 2 Physical Mechanism and Numerical Modeling of Liquid Propellant Atomization 26 2.1 Types and Functions of Injectors in a Liquid Rocket Engine 27 2.2 Atomization Mechanism of Liquid Propellant 28 2.2.1 Formation of Static Liquid Droplet 28 2.2.2 Breakup of Cylindrical Liquid Jet 29 2.2.3 Liquid Sheet Breakup 36 2.2.4 Droplet Secondary Breakup 43 2.3 Characteristics of Atomization in Liquid Rocket Engines 48 2.3.1 Distribution Function of the Droplet Size 51 2.3.2 Mean Diameter and Characteristic Diameter 53 2.3.3 Measurement of Spray Size Distribution 55 2.4 Atomization Modeling for Liquid Rocket Engine Atomizers 59 2.4.1 Straight-flow Injector 60 2.4.2 Centrifugal Injector 60 2.4.3 Impinging-stream Injectors 64 2.4.4 Coaxial Shear Injector 70 2.4.5 Coaxial Centrifugal Injectors 70 2.5 Numerical Simulation of Liquid Propellant Atomization 75 2.5.1 Theoretical Models of Liquid Propellant Atomization 75 2.5.2 Quasi-fluid Models 80 2.5.3 Particle Trajectory Models 81 2.5.4 Simulation of Liquid Jet Atomization Using Interface Tracking Method 85 2.5.5 Liquid Jet Structure – Varying Flow Conditions 91 References 94 3 Modeling of Droplet Evaporation and Combustion 97 3.1 Theory for Quasi-Steady Evaporation and Combustion of a Single Droplet at Atmospheric Pressure 97 3.1.1 Quasi-Steady Evaporation Theory for Single Droplet in the Static Gas without Combustion 98 3.1.2 Quasi-Steady Evaporation Theory for Droplet in a Static Gas with Combustion 103 3.1.3 Non-Combustion Evaporation Theory for a Droplet in a Convective Flow 107 3.1.4 Evaporation Theory for a Droplet in a Convective Medium with Combustion 108 3.2 Evaporation Model for a Single Droplet under High Pressure 109 3.2.1 ZKS Droplet High Pressure Evaporation Theory 110 3.2.2 Application of the Liquid Activity Coefficient to Calculate the Gas–Liquid Equilibrium at a High Pressure 115 3.3 Subcritical Evaporation Response Characteristics of Propellant Droplet in Oscillatory Environments 117 3.3.1 Physical Model 118 3.3.2 Examples and the Analysis of Results 120 3.4 Multicomponent Fuel Droplet Evaporation Model 123 3.4.1 Simple Multicomponent Droplet Evaporation Model 124 3.4.2 Continuous Thermodynamics Model of Complex Multicomponent Mixture Droplet Evaporation 135 3.5 Droplet Group Evaporation 145 3.5.1 Definition of Group Combustion Number 146 3.5.2 Droplet Group Combustion Model 146 References 149 4 Modeling of Turbulence 151 4.1 Turbulence Modeling in RANS 152 4.1.1 Algebraic Model 153 4.1.2 One-Equation Model 154 4.1.3 Two-Equation Models 156 4.1.4 Turbulence Model Modification 161 4.1.5 Nonlinear Eddy Viscosity Model 165 4.1.6 Reynolds-Stress Model 170 4.1.7 Comments on the Models 173 4.2 Theories and Equations of Large Eddy Simulation 174 4.2.1 Philosophy behind LES 174 4.2.2 LES Governing Equations 175 4.2.3 Subgrid-Scale Model 176 4.2.4 Hybrid RANS/LES Methods 182 4.3 Two-Phase Turbulence Model 187 4.3.1 Hinze–Tchen Algebraic Model for Particle Turbulence 187 4.3.2 Two-Phase Turbulence Model k-ε-kp and k-ε-Ap 188 References 189 5 Turbulent Combustion Model 192 5.1 Average of Chemical Reaction Term 192 5.2 Presumed PDF—Fast Chemistry Model for Diffusion Flame 194 5.2.1 Concepts and Assumptions 195 5.2.2 κ−ε−Z −g Equations 197 5.2.3 Probability Density Distribution Function 197 5.2.4 Presumed PDF 198 5.2.5 Truncated Gaussian PDF 200 5.3 Finite Rate EBU—Arrhenius Model for Premixed Flames 201 5.4 Moment-Equation Model 202 5.4.1 Time-Averaged Chemical Reaction Rate 203 5.4.2 Closure for the Moments 203 5.5 Flamelet Model for Turbulent Combustion 204 5.5.1 Diffusion Flamelet Model 205 5.5.2 Premixed Flamelet Model 206 5.6 Transported PDF Method for Turbulent Combustion 208 5.6.1 Transport Equations of the Probability Density Function 208 5.6.2 The Closure Problem of Turbulence PDF Equation 211 5.6.3 Transport Equation for the Single-Point Joint PDF with Density-Weighted Average 212 5.6.4 Solution Algorithm for the Transport Equation of Probability Density Function 212 5.7 Large Eddy Simulation of Turbulent Combustion 214 5.7.1 Governing Equations of Large Eddy Simulation for Turbulent Combustion 214 5.7.2 Sub-Grid Scale Combustion Models 218 References 226 6 Heat Transfer Modeling and Simulation 228 6.1 Convective Heat Transfer Model of Combustor Wall 228 6.1.1 Model of Gas Convection Heat 229 6.1.2 Convection Cooling Model 232 6.2 Heat Conduction Model of Combustor Wall 235 6.2.1 Fourier Heat Conduction Law 235 6.2.2 1D Steady Heat Conduction 235 6.2.3 2D Steady Heat Conduction 237 6.2.4 Unsteady Heat Conduction 237 6.3 Radiation Heat Transfer Model 238 6.3.1 Basic Law of Radiation 238 6.3.2 Empirical Model of Radiation Heat Flux Density Calculation 245 6.3.3 Numerical Simulation of Combustion Heat Radiation 246 References 254 7 The Model of Combustion Instability 255 7.1 Overview 255 7.1.1 Behavior of Combustion Instability 256 7.1.2 Classification of Combustion Instability 257 7.1.3 Characteristics of Combustion Instability 259 7.2 Acoustic Basis of Combustion Instability 260 7.2.1 Rayleigh Criterion for Acoustic Oscillations Arising from Heat or Mass Supply 260 7.2.2 Acoustic and Acoustic Oscillations 261 7.2.3 Acoustic Modes in the Combustion Chamber 263 7.2.4 Self-Excited Oscillations in Rocket Engines 267 7.3 Response Characteristics of Combustion Process in Liquid Rocket Engines 269 7.3.1 Response Characteristics of the Propellant Supply System 269 7.3.2 Response Characteristics of Spray Atomization Process 271 7.3.3 Response Characteristics of Droplet Evaporation Process 272 7.4 Sensitive Time Delay Model n−τ 272 7.4.1 Combustion Time Delay 272 7.4.2 Sensitive Time Delay Model 273 7.5 Nonlinear Theory for Combustion Stability in Liquid Rocket Engines 283 7.5.1 Nonlinear Field Oscillator Model 286 7.5.2 Continuous Stirred Tank Reactor Acoustic Model 287 7.5.3 Spatio-Temporal Interaction Dynamic Model 291 7.5.4 General Thermodynamic Analysis of Combustion Instability 293 7.6 Control of Unstable Combustion 295 7.6.1 Passive Control 295 7.6.2 Active Control 297 7.6.3 A Third Control Method 298 References 300 8 Numerical Method and Simulations of Liquid Rocket Engine Combustion Process 302 8.1 Governing Equations of Two-Phase Multicomponent Reaction Flows 302 8.1.1 Gas Phase Governing Equation 303 8.1.2 Liquid Particle Trajectory Model 305 8.1.3 Turbulence Model 308 8.1.4 Droplets Atomizing Model 309 8.1.5 Droplet Evaporation Model 311 8.1.6 Chemical Reaction Kinetics Model 313 8.2 Numerical Methodology 314 8.2.1 Overview 314 8.2.2 The Commonly-Used Discretization Scheme 315 8.2.3 Discrete Equations 320 8.2.4 Discretization of the Momentum Equation Based on the Staggered Grid 323 8.2.5 The SIMPLE Algorithm of Flow Field Computing 326 8.2.6 PISO Algorithm 329 8.3 Grid Generation Techniques 334 8.3.1 Structured Grid Generation Technology 334 8.3.2 Unstructured Mesh Generation Techniques 338 8.4 Simulations of Combustion in Liquid Rocket Engines and Results Analysis 340 8.4.1 Numerical Analysis of Dual-States Hydrogen Engine Combustion and Heat Transfer Processes 340 8.4.2 Numerical Heat Transfer Simulation of a Three-Component Thrust Chamber 349 8.4.3 Numerical Simulation of Liquid Rocket Engine Combustion Stability 356 References 376 Index 377

    10 in stock

    £114.90

  • MultiAgentBased Production Planning and Control

    John Wiley & Sons Inc MultiAgentBased Production Planning and Control

    2 in stock

    Book SynopsisAt the crossroads of artificial intelligence, manufacturing engineering, operational research and industrial engineering and management, multi-agent based production planning and control is an intelligent and industrially crucial technology with increasing importance. This book provides a complete overview of multi-agent based methods for today's competitive manufacturing environment, including the Job Shop Manufacturing and Re-entrant Manufacturing processes. In addition to the basic control and scheduling systems, the author also highlights advance research in numerical optimization methods and wireless sensor networks and their impact on intelligent production planning and control system operation. Enables students, researchers and engineers to understand the fundamentals and theories of multi-agent based production planning and control Written by an author with more than 20 years' experience in studying and formulating a complete theoretical system in produTable of ContentsPreface xiii About this book xv 1 Agent Technology in Modern Manufacturing 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Agent and Multi]Agent System 1 1.3 Agent Technologies in Manufacturing Systems 7 1.4 Book Organization 11 References 14 2 The Technical Foundation of a Multi–Agent System 21 2.1 Introduction 21 2.2 The Structure of an Agent 21 2.3 The Structure of a Multi–Agent System 29 2.4 Modeling Methods of a Multi–gent System 34 2.5 The Communication and Interaction Model of a Multi–Agent System 37 2.6 The Communication Protocol for a Multi–Agent System 39 2.7 The Interaction Protocol for a Multi–Agent System 43 2.8 Conclusion 50 References 50 3 Multi–Agent–Based Production Planning and Control 55 3.1 Introduction 55 3.2 Manufacturing Systems 56 3.3 Production Planning and Control 61 3.4 Multi–Agent–Based Push–Pull Production Planning and Control System (MAP4CS) 71 3.4.1 Mapping Methods 72 3.5 Conclusion 90 References 91 4 Multi–Agent–Based Production Planning for Distributed Manufacturing Systems 95 4.1 Introduction 95 4.2 Production Planning for Distributed Manufacturing Systems 96 4.3 Multi–Agent-Based Production Planning in Distributed Manufacturing Systems 106 4.4 Agents in Multi-Agent Production Planning Systems 118 4.5 Contract Net Protocol-Based Production Planning Optimization Method 123 4.6 Bid Auction Protocol-Based Production Planning Optimization Method 133 4.7 Conclusion 139 References 140 5 Multi-Agent-Based Production Scheduling for Job Shop Manufacturing Systems 143 5.1 Introduction 143 5.2 Production Scheduling in Job Shop Manufacturing Systems 144 5.3 Multi-Agent Double Feedback–Based Production Scheduling in Job Shop Manufacturing Systems 153 5.4 Agents in the Multi-Agent Double Feedback–Based Scheduling System 158 5.5 Positive Feedback–Based Production Scheduling in Job Shop Manufacturing Systems 162 5.6 Negative Feedback–Based Production Rescheduling in Job Shop Manufacturing Systems 177 5.7 Conclusion 188 References 190 6 Multi-Agent-Based Production Scheduling in Re-Entrant Manufacturing Systems 197 6.1 Introduction 197 6.2 Production Scheduling in Re-Entrant Manufacturing Systems 198 6.3 Multi-Agent-Based Hierarchical Adaptive Production Scheduling in Re-Entrant Manufacturing Systems 208 6.4 Agents in a Multi-Agent Hierarchical Adaptive Production Scheduling System 212 6.5 Hierarchical Production Scheduling in Re-Entrant Manufacturing Systems 218 6.6 Adaptive Rescheduling in Re-Entrant Manufacturing Systems 244 6.7 Conclusion 253 References 258 7 Multi-Agent-Based Production Control 263 7.1 Introduction 263 7.2 Multi-Agent Production Control System 264 7.3 Agents in Multi-Agent Production Control Systems 271 7.4 Technologies and Methods for Multi-Agent Production Control Systems 283 7.5 Conclusion 294 References 295 8 Multi-Agent-Based Material Data Acquisition 297 8.1 Introduction 297 8.2 RFID Technology 297 8.3 Agent-Based Material Data Acquisition System 306 8.4 Agents in Multi-Agent RFID-Based Material Data Acquisition Systems 312 8.5 Multi-Agent RFID-Based Material Data Acquisition Systems 326 8.6 Conclusion 329 References 332 9 Multi-Agent-Based Equipment Data Acquisition 333 9.1 Introduction 333 9.2 Basics of OPC Technology 334 9.3 Agent-Based Equipment Data Acquisition System 340 9.4 Agents in the Multi-Agent OPC-Based Equipment Data Acquisition System 347 9.5 Implementation of a Multi-Agent OPC-Based System 355 9.6 Conclusion 361 References 361 10 The Prototype of a Multi-Agent-Based Production Planning and Control System 363 10.1 Introduction 363 10.2 Architecture of a Prototype System 363 10.3 Agent Packages and Communication in a Prototype System 366 10.4 The Manufacturing System Simulation in a Prototype System 375 10.5 Software Implementation and Application of a Prototype System 383 10.6 Conclusion 399 References 399 Index 401

    2 in stock

    £128.66

  • Thermal Management of Electric Vehicle Battery

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Thermal Management of Electric Vehicle Battery

    Book SynopsisThermal Management of Electric Vehicle Battery Systems provides a thorough examination of various conventional and cutting edge electric vehicle (EV) battery thermal management systems (including phase change material) that are currently used in the industry as well as being proposed for future EV batteries.Table of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgements xvii 1 Introductory Aspects of Electric Vehicles 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Technology Development and Commercialization 2 1.3 Vehicle Configurations 4 1.3.1 Internal Combustion Engine Vehicles (ICEV) 4 1.3.2 All Electric Vehicles (AEVs) 6 1.3.3 Hybrid Electric Vehicles (HEVs) 7 1.3.4 Fuel Cell Vehicles (FCVs) 10 1.4 Hybridization Rate 10 1.4.1 Micro HEVs 11 1.4.2 Mild HEVs 11 1.4.3 Full or Power-Assist HEVs 12 1.4.4 Plug-In HEVs (or Range-Extended Hybrids) 12 1.5 Vehicle Architecture 13 1.5.1 Series HEVs 14 1.5.2 Parallel HEVs 14 1.5.3 Parallel/Series HEVs 14 1.5.4 Complex HEVs 15 1.6 Energy Storage System 15 1.6.1 Batteries 15 1.6.2 Ultracapacitors (UCs) 17 1.6.3 Flywheels 18 1.6.4 Fuel Cells 18 1.7 Grid Connection 20 1.7.1 Charger Power Levels and Infrastructure 20 1.7.2 Conductive Charging 21 1.7.3 Inductive Charging 22 1.7.4 Smart Grid and V2G/V2H/V2X Systems 23 1.8 Sustainability, Environmental Impact and Cost Aspects 27 1.9 Vehicle Thermal Management 28 1.9.1 Radiator Circuit 29 1.9.2 Power Electronics Circuit 29 1.9.3 Drive Unit Circuit 30 1.9.4 A/C Circuit 30 1.10 Vehicle Drive Patterns and Cycles 33 1.11 Case Study 34 1.11.1 Introduction 34 1.11.2 Research Programs 34 1.11.3 Government Incentives 35 1.11.3.1 Tax Benefits 35 1.11.3.2 EV Supply Equipment and Charging Infrastructure 36 1.11.3.3 EV Developments in the Turkish Market 36 1.11.3.4 HEVs on the Road 38 1.11.3.5 Turkey’s Standing in the World 39 1.11.3.6 SWOT Analysis 43 1.12 Concluding Remarks 43 Nomenclature 44 Study Questions/Problems 44 References 45 2 Electric Vehicle Battery Technologies 49 2.1 Introduction 49 2.2 Current Battery Technologies 49 2.2.1 Lead Acid Batteries 51 2.2.2 Nickel Cadmium Batteries 52 2.2.3 Nickel Metal Hydride Batteries 52 2.2.4 Lithium-Ion Batteries 54 2.3 Battery Technologies under Development 57 2.3.1 Zinc-Air Batteries 59 2.3.2 Sodium-Air Batteries 60 2.3.3 Lithium-Sulfur Batteries 60 2.3.4 Aluminum-Air Batteries 61 2.3.5 Lithium-Air Batteries 61 2.4 Battery Characteristics 63 2.4.1 Battery Cost 63 2.4.2 Battery Environmental Impact 64 2.4.3 Battery Material Resources 68 2.4.4 Impact of Various Loads and Environmental Conditions 70 2.5 Battery Management Systems 72 2.5.1 Data Acquisition 75 2.5.2 Battery States Estimation 76 2.5.2.1 SOC Estimation Algorithm 76 2.5.2.2 SOH Estimation Algorithms 78 2.5.2.3 SOF Estimation Algorithms 78 2.5.3 Charge Equalization 78 2.5.3.1 Hierarchical Architecture Platform/Communication 80 2.5.3.2 Cell Equalization 80 2.5.4 Safety Management/Fault Diagnosis 81 2.5.5 Thermal Management 83 2.6 Battery Manufacturing and Testing Processes 83 2.6.1 Manufacturing Processes 83 2.6.2 Testing Processes 85 2.7 Concluding Remarks 88 Nomenclature 88 Study Questions/Problems 88 References 89 3 Phase Change Materials for Passive TMSs 93 3.1 Introduction 93 3.2 Basic Properties and Types of PCMs 93 3.2.1 Organic PCMs 100 3.2.1.1 Paraffins 101 3.2.1.2 Non-Paraffins 101 3.2.2 Inorganic PCMs 102 3.2.2.1 Salt Hydrates 102 3.2.2.2 Metals 103 3.2.3 Eutectics 104 3.3 Measurement of Thermal Properties of PCMs 104 3.4 Heat Transfer Enhancements 107 3.5 Cost and Environmental Impact of Phase Change Materials 110 3.6 Applications of PCMs 111 3.7 Case Study I: Heat Exchanger Design and Optimization Model for EV Batteries using PCMs 114 3.7.1 System Description and Parameters 114 3.7.1.1 Simplified System Diagram 114 3.7.1.2 PCM Selection For the Application 115 3.7.1.3 Nano-Particles and PCM Mixture For Thermal Conductivity Enhancement 116 3.7.1.4 Thermal Modeling of Heat Exchanger 117 3.7.2 Design and Optimization of the Latent Heat Thermal Energy Storage System 119 3.7.2.1 Objective Functions, Design Parameters and Constraints 119 3.7.2.2 Effective Properties of the PCM and Nanotubes 119 3.7.2.3 Combined Condition 121 3.7.2.4 Model Description 121 3.7.2.5 Sensitivity Analysis 121 3.7.2.6 Helical Tube Heat Exchanger 127 3.8 Case Study 2: Melting and Solidification of Paraffin in a Spherical Shell from Forced External Convection 128 3.8.1 Validation of Numerical Model and Model Independence Testing 130 3.8.2 Performance Criteria 133 3.8.3 Results and Discussion 135 3.9 Concluding Remarks 141 Nomenclature 141 Study Questions/Problems 143 References 143 4 Simulation and Experimental Investigation of Battery TMSs 145 4.1 Introduction 145 4.2 Numerical Model Development for Cell and Submodules 146 4.2.1 Physical Model for Numerical Study of PCM Application 146 4.2.2 Initial and Boundary Conditions and Model Assumptions 147 4.2.3 Material Properties and Model Input Parameters 148 4.2.3.1 Li-ion Cell Properties 148 4.2.3.2 Phase Change Material (PCM) 149 4.2.3.3 Foam Material 153 4.2.3.4 Cooling Plate 153 4.2.4 Governing Equations and Constitutive Laws 153 4.2.5 Model Development for Simulations 155 4.2.5.1 Mesh Generation 156 4.2.5.2 Discretization Scheme 156 4.2.5.3 Under-Relaxation Scheme 157 4.2.5.4 Convergence Criteria 157 4.3 Cell and Module Level Experimentation Set Up and Procedure 157 4.3.1 Instrumentation of the Cell and Submodule 158 4.3.2 Instrumentation of the Heat Exchanger 159 4.3.3 Preparation of PCMs and Nano-Particle Mixtures 161 4.3.4 Improving Surface Arrangements of Particles 163 4.3.5 Setting up the Test Bench 164 4.4 Vehicle Level Experimentation Set Up and Procedure 166 4.4.1 Setting Up the Data Acquisition Hardware 166 4.4.2 Setting Up the Data Acquisition Software 168 4.5 Illustrative Example: Simulations and Experimentations on the Liquid Battery Thermal Management System Using PCMs 172 4.5.1 Simulations and Experimentations on Cell Level 174 4.5.1.1 Grid Independence Tests 175 4.5.1.2 Effect of Contact Resistance on Heat Transfer Rate 176 4.5.1.3 Simulation Results For Li-ion cell Without PCM in Steady State and Transient Response 177 4.5.1.4 Simulation Results For PCM in Steady-State and Transient Conditions 180 4.5.1.5 Cooling Effectiveness In the Cell 185 4.5.2 Simulation and Experimentations Between the Cells in the Submodule 186 4.5.2.1 Effective Properties of Soaked Foam 187 4.5.2.2 Steady State Response of the Cells in the Submodule 188 4.5.2.3 Transient Response of the Submodule 189 4.5.2.4 Submodule with Dry and Wet Foam at Higher Heat Generation Rates 191 4.5.3 Simulations and Experimentations on a Submodule Level 192 4.5.3.1 Steady-State Response of the Submodule Without PCMs 193 4.5.3.2 Steady-State Results of the Submodule with PCMs 196 4.5.3.3 Transient Response of the Submodule 197 4.5.3.4 Quasi-Steady Response of the Submodule 198 4.5.3.5 Model Validation 201 4.5.4 Optical Observations 203 4.5.4.1 Thermal Conductivity Enhancement by Nanoparticles 203 4.5.4.2 Data For the Case of Pure PCM (99% Purity) 208 4.5.4.3 Optical Microscopy Analysis of the PCM and Nanoparticle Mixture 208 4.5.5 Vehicle Level Experimentations 214 4.5.5.1 Test Bench Experimentations 215 4.5.5.2 Test Vehicle Experimentations 218 4.5.6 Case Study Conclusions 225 4.6 Concluding Remarks 226 Nomenclature 227 Study Questions/Problems 228 References 229 5 Energy and Exergy Analyses of Battery TMSs 231 5.1 Introduction 231 5.2 TMS Comparison 232 5.2.1 Thermodynamic Analysis 233 5.2.2 Battery Heat Transfer Analysis 237 5.2.2.1 Battery Temperature Distribution 237 5.2.2.2 Battery Temperature Uniformity 239 5.3 Modeling of Major TMS Components 240 5.3.1 Compressor 242 5.3.2 Heat Exchangers 243 5.3.3 Thermal Expansion Valve (TXV) 245 5.3.4 Electric Battery 246 5.3.5 System Parameters 246 5.4 Energy and Exergy Analyses 247 5.4.1 Conventional Analysis 247 5.4.2 Enhanced Exergy Analysis 253 5.5 Illustrative Example: Liquid Battery Thermal Management Systems 256 5.6 Case Study: Transcritical CO2-Based Electric Vehicle BTMS 269 5.6.1 Introduction 270 5.6.2 System Development 272 5.6.3 Thermodynamic Analysis 275 5.6.4 Results and Discussion 276 5.6.5 Case Study Conclusions 281 5.7 Concluding Remarks 282 Nomenclature 282 Study Questions/Problems 284 References 285 6 Cost, Environmental Impact and Multi-Objective Optimization of Battery TMSs 287 6.1 Introduction 287 6.2 Exergoeconomic Analysis 288 6.2.1 Cost Balance Equations 288 6.2.2 Purchase Equipment Cost Correlations 290 6.2.3 Cost Accounting 291 6.2.4 Exergoeconomic Evaluation 293 6.2.5 Enhanced Exergoeconomic Analysis 293 6.2.6 Enviroeconomic (Environmental Cost) Analysis 294 6.3 Exergoenvironmental Analysis 295 6.3.1 Environmental Impact Balance Equations 295 6.3.2 Environmental Impact Correlations 296 6.3.3 LCA of the Electric Battery 297 6.3.4 Environmental Impact Accounting 299 6.3.5 Exergoenvironmental Evaluation 300 6.4 Optimization Methodology 301 6.4.1 Objective Functions 301 6.4.2 Decision Variables and Constraints 302 6.4.3 Genetic Algorithm 303 6.5 Illustrative Example: Liquid Battery Thermal Management Systems 306 6.5.1 Conventional Exergoeconomic Analysis Results 307 6.5.2 Enhanced Exergoeconomic Analysis Results 309 6.5.3 Battery Environmental Impact Assessment 314 6.5.4 Exergoenvironmental Analysis Results 316 6.5.5 Multi-Objective Optimization Results 319 6.5.5.1 Case Study Conclusions 324 6.6 Concluding Remarks 325 Nomenclature 326 Study Questions/Problems 327 References 328 7 Case Studies 329 7.1 Introduction 329 7.2 Case Study 1: Economic and Environmental Comparison of Conventional, Hybrid, Electric and Hydrogen Fuel Cell Vehicles 329 7.2.1 Introduction 329 7.2.2 Analysis 330 7.2.2.1 Economic Criteria 330 7.2.2.2 Environmental Impact Criteria 331 7.2.2.3 Normalization and General Indicator 334 7.2.3 Results and Discussion 335 7.2.4 Closing Remarks 338 7.3 Case Study 2: Experimental and Theoretical Investigation of Temperature Distributions in a Prismatic Lithium-Ion Battery 339 7.3.1 Introduction 339 7.3.2 System Description 340 7.3.3 Analysis 341 7.3.3.1 Temperature Measurements 341 7.3.3.2 Heat Generation 342 7.3.4 Results and Discussion 342 7.3.4.1 Battery Discharge Voltage Profile 342 7.3.4.2 Battery Internal Resistance Profile 343 7.3.4.3 Effect of Discharge Rates and Operating Temperature on Battery Performance 344 7.3.4.4 Model Development and Validation 344 7.3.5 Closing Remarks 350 7.4 Case Study 3: Thermal Management Solutions for Electric Vehicle Lithium-Ion Batteries based on Vehicle Charge and Discharge Cycles 351 7.4.1 Introduction 351 7.4.2 System Description 351 7.4.3 Analysis 352 7.4.3.1 Design of Hybrid Test Stand For Thermal Management 352 7.4.3.2 Battery Cooling System 356 7.4.3.3 Sensors and Flow Meter 356 7.4.3.4 Compression Rig 356 7.4.3.5 Battery 359 7.4.3.6 Thermal Management System – Experimental Plan and Procedure 359 7.4.3.7 Data Analysis Method 361 7.4.4 Results and Discussion 364 7.4.4.1 Battery Surface Temperature Profile 365 7.4.4.2 Average Surface Temperature of Battery 366 7.4.4.3 Average Heat Flux 368 7.4.4.4 Peak Heat Flux 369 7.4.4.5 Heat Generation Rate 369 7.4.4.6 Total Heat Generated 373 7.4.4.7 Effect of Discharge Rate and Operating Temperature on Discharge Capacity 373 7.4.5 Closing Remarks 374 7.5 Case Study 4: Heat Transfer and Thermal Management of Electric Vehicle Batteries with Phase Change Materials 375 7.5.1 Introduction 375 7.5.2 System Description 375 7.5.3 Analysis 378 7.5.3.1 Exergy Analysis 378 7.5.3.2 Numerical Study 379 7.5.4 Results and Discussion 379 7.5.4.1 CFD Analysis 379 7.5.4.2 Part II: Exergy Analysis 385 7.5.5 Closing Remarks 388 7.6 Case Study 5: Experimental and Theoretical Investigation of Novel Phase Change Materials For Thermal Applications 389 7.6.1 Introduction 389 7.6.2 System Description 390 7.6.2.1 Experimental Layouts 393 7.6.2.2 Challenges 397 7.6.3 Analysis 397 7.6.3.1 Analysis of Constant Temperature Bath 402 7.6.3.2 Analysis of Hot Air Duct 402 7.6.3.3 Analysis of Battery Cooling 403 7.6.3.4 Energy and Exergy Analyses 403 7.6.4 Results and Discussion 407 7.6.4.1 Test Results of Base PCM 408 7.6.4.2 Results of Battery Cooling Tests 410 7.6.4.3 Results of Energy and Exergy Analyses on Base Clathrate 412 7.6.4.4 Results of Thermoeconomic Analysis 415 7.6.5 Closing Remarks 417 Nomenclature 419 References 423 8 Alternative Dimensions and Future Expectations 425 8.1 Introduction 425 8.2 Outstanding Challenges 425 8.2.1 Consumer Perceptions 425 8.2.2 Socio-Technical Factors 427 8.2.3 Self-Reinforcing Processes 429 8.3 Emerging EV Technologies and Trends 431 8.3.1 Active Roads 431 8.3.2 V2X and Smart Grid 432 8.3.3 Battery Swapping 433 8.3.4 Battery Second Use 435 8.4 Future BTM Technologies 437 8.4.1 Thermoelectric Materials 437 8.4.2 Magnetic Cooling 438 8.4.3 Piezoelectric Fans/Dual Cooling Jets 438 8.4.4 Other Potential BTMSs 440 8.5 Concluding Remarks 441 Nomenclature 441 Study Questions/Problems 441 References 442 Index 445

    £92.66

  • Machining of Stainless Steels and Super Alloys

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Machining of Stainless Steels and Super Alloys

    Book SynopsisProvides a comprehensive description for machining technologies of stainless steels and super alloys with consideration to current industrial applications. Presents current and recent developments related to traditional and nontraditional machining techniques of stainless steels and super alloys Arranges types of stainless steels and super alloys in qualitative and quantitative form, as related to their machining characteristics, providing the reader with information regarding optimum working condition for each material Proposes a 10-level machinability chart to rank important grades of stainless steels Arranges the machinability rating of the most commonly used super alloys in a descending order Presents non-traditional machining processes along with some hybrid processes which have been applied successfully to stainless steels and super alloys Table of ContentsPreface xiii About the Author xix Acknowledgments xxi Nomenclature xxiii Glossary xxvii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Stainless Steels and Super Alloys as Difficult]to]Cut Materials 1 1.1.1 Historical Background of Stainless Steels and Super Alloys 2 1.1.1.1 Stainless Steels 2 1.1.1.2 Super Alloys 3 1.1.2 Industrial Applications of Stainless Steels and Super Alloys 3 1.1.2.1 Stainless Steels 3 1.1.2.2 Super Alloys 4 1.2 Traditional and Nontraditional Machining Processes 4 1.2.1 Importance of Machining in Manufacturing Technology 4 1.2.2 Classification of Machining Processes 6 1.2.3 Variables of Machining Processes 9 1.2.3.1 Input (Independent) Variables 9 1.2.3.2 Output (Dependent) Variables 9 References 10 2 Types and Classifications of Stainless Steels 11 2.1 Role of Alloying Elements in Stainless Steels 11 2.2 Types of Stainless Steels 13 2.2.1 Basic Alloys of Stainless Steels (Ferritic, Martensitic, Austenitic) 13 2.2.1.1 Ferritic Stainless Steels of AISI]Designations 13 2.2.1.2 Martensitic Stainless Steels also of AISI]Designation 18 2.2.1.3 Austenitic Stainless Steels of AISI]Designation 19 2.2.2 Derived Alloys of Stainless Steels (Duplex, PH]Alloys) 22 2.3 Concluding Comments and Comparative Characteristics 23 References 26 3 Types and Classifications of Super Alloys 27 3.1 General Features and Classifications 27 3.2 Types of Super Alloys 28 3.2.1 Fe]Base Alloys 31 3.2.2 Ni]Base Alloys 34 3.2.3 Co]Base Alloys 39 References 41 4 Traditional Machining – Machinability, Tooling, and Cutting Fluids 43 4.1 Machinability Concept in Metal Cutting 43 4.1.1 Definition and General Aspects 43 4.1.2 Quantifying and Criteria of Machinability 44 4.1.2.1 Tool Life Criterion 46 4.1.2.2 Cutting Forces and Power Consumption Criterion 48 4.1.2.3 Surface Finish Criterion 50 4.1.3 Enhancing Machinability of Difficult]to]Cut Materials 50 4.1.3.1 Adoption of Free Machining Steels and Alloys 50 4.1.3.2 Thermally Assisted Machining (Hot Machining) 52 4.1.3.3 High Speed Machining 52 4.1.3.4 Ultrasonic]Assisted Machining 60 4.1.3.5 Advanced Cooling Techniques 61 4.1.3.6 Cryogenic Treatment of Tool Materials 63 4.2 Cutting Tool Materials 63 4.2.1 Characteristics of an Ideal Tool Material 64 4.2.2 Types of Cutting Tool Materials 65 4.2.2.1 High Speed Steel (HSS) 65 4.2.2.2 Cast Nonferrous Alloys (Stellite and UCON) 67 4.2.2.3 Cemented Carbides (Widia) 69 4.2.2.4 Cemented Titanium Carbides (TiC]Based Tools) 73 4.2.2.5 Cermets 73 4.2.2.6 Ceramics (Alumina]Based Tools) 73 4.2.2.7 SiAlON 74 4.2.2.8 Cubic Boron Nitride (CBN) 74 4.2.2.9 Diamond 75 4.2.3 Tool Materials for Machining of Stainless Steels and Super Alloys 75 4.2.3.1 Cutting Tool Materials for Stainless Steels 76 4.2.3.2 Tool Materials for Super Alloys 77 4.3 Cutting Fluids for Stainless Steels and Super Alloys 81 4.3.1 Functions, Characteristics, and General Considerations 81 4.3.2 Types of Cutting Fluids 82 4.3.2.1 Water]Base Liquids 82 4.3.2.2 Neat Oils 83 4.3.2.3 Liquid Gas or Cryogenic Coolants 83 4.3.2.4 Solid Lubricants 84 4.3.3 Application Methods 84 4.3.4 Cutting Fluids for Stainless Steels 85 4.3.4.1 Sulfo]chlorinated Cutting Oils 85 4.3.4.2 Emulsifiable Fluids 86 4.3.4.3 Selection of Cutting Fluid for Stainless Steels 87 4.3.5 Cutting Fluids for Super Alloys 88 4.3.5.1 Turning, Planing, Shaping, and Boring 88 4.3.5.2 Broaching 88 4.3.5.3 Drilling and Reaming 89 4.3.5.4 Tapping and Thread Cutting 89 4.3.5.5 Milling 89 4.3.5.6 Sawing 89 4.3.5.7 Grinding 89 References 91 5 Traditional Machining of Stainless Steels 93 5.1 Machinability of Stainless Steels 93 5.1.1 Free]Machining Additives of Stainless Steels 94 5.1.2 Machinability of Free] and Nonfree]Machining Stainless Steels 97 5.1.2.1 Ferritic and Martensitic Alloys 99 5.1.2.2 Austenitic Alloys 100 5.1.2.3 Duplex Alloys 101 5.1.2.4 PH]Alloys 102 5.1.3 Enhanced Machining Stainless Steels 102 5.1.4 Machinability Ratings of Stainless Steels 102 5.2 Traditional Machining Processes of Stainless Steels 103 5.2.1 Turning 103 5.2.1.1 Form Turning and Cutting Off 104 5.2.2 Drilling 106 5.2.2.1 Important Hints When Drilling Stainless Steels 107 5.2.3 Reaming 110 5.2.3.1 Tool Geometry of Reamers for Stainless Steels 110 5.2.3.2 Reaming Parameters 111 5.2.4 Milling 111 5.2.5 Broaching 112 5.2.6 Grinding 114 5.3 Surface Treatments of Stainless Steel after Machining 114 5.3.1 Chemical Cleaning (Pickling) 115 5.3.2 Passivating 116 References 118 6 Traditional Machining of Super Alloys 119 6.1 Machinability Aspects of Super Alloys 119 6.2 Machinability Rating of Super Alloys 120 6.2.1 Machinability as Based on Tool Life and Nominal Cutting Speeds 121 6.2.2 Machinability as Based on Specific Cutting Energy 124 6.3 Traditional Machining Processes (TMPs) of Super Alloys 125 6.3.1 Challenges and Machining Guidelines for Super Alloys 126 6.3.2 Turning 127 6.3.3 Drilling 130 6.3.4 Reaming 133 6.3.5 Milling 133 6.3.6 Broaching 137 6.3.7 Grinding 139 6.3.7.1 Selection of Grinding Wheel Designation 139 References 140 7 Nontraditional Machining Processes – an Overview 141 7.1 Nontraditional Machining Processes 141 7.2 Mechanical Nontraditional Processes 142 7.2.1 Jet Machining 142 7.2.1.1 Abrasive Jet Machining 142 7.2.1.2 Water Jet Machining 143 7.2.1.3 Abrasive Water Jet Machining 145 7.2.2 Abrasive Flow Machining 146 7.2.2.1 Parameters Affecting MRR of AFM 147 7.2.2.2 Advantages of AFM 147 7.2.3 Ultrasonic Machining 147 7.2.3.1 Transducer and Magnetostriction Effect 149 7.2.3.2 Acoustic Horns (Mechanical Amplifiers or Concentrators) 150 7.2.3.3 Process Capabilities 150 7.3 Electrochemical and Chemical Machining Processes 151 7.3.1 Electrochemical Machining 151 7.3.1.1 Process Capabilities 152 7.3.1.2 Pulsed Electrochemical Machining (PECM) 154 7.3.1.3 Shaped Tube Electrolytic Machining (STEM) 156 7.3.1.4 Electro]stream (ES) or Capillary Drilling 158 7.3.2 Electrochemical Grinding 159 7.3.3 Chemical Machining 160 7.3.3.1 Chemical Milling (CH]milling) 160 7.3.3.2 Photochemical Machining (Spray Etching) 162 7.4 Thermoelectric Processes 164 7.4.1 Electrical Discharge Machining 164 7.4.1.1 Types of Generators, Applicable for ED]Machines 165 7.4.1.2 Process Capabilities 165 7.4.2 Electron Beam Machining 166 7.4.3 Laser Beam Machining 168 7.4.4 Plasma Arc Cutting 172 7.5 Nontraditional Machining Processes – an Outlook 173 References 177 8 Nontraditional Machining of Stainless Steels and Super Alloys 179 8.1 Mechanical Nontraditional Machining Processes of Stainless Steels and Super Alloys 179 8.1.1 Jet Machining 179 8.1.2 Ultrasonic Machining (USM) of Stainless Steels and Super Alloys 180 8.1.3 Abrasive Flow Machining of Stainless Steels and Super Alloys 181 8.2 Electrochemical and Chemical Machining Processes of Stainless Steels and Super Alloys 183 8.2.1 Electrochemical Machining 183 8.2.2 Shaped Tube Electrolytic Machining (STEM) of Stainless Steel and Super Alloys 194 8.2.3 Electro]stream (ES) Machining of Stainless Steel and Super Alloys 196 8.2.4 Electrochemical Grinding (ECG) of Stainless Steels and Super Alloys 196 8.2.5 Chemical Milling (CH]Milling) 196 8.2.5.1 MRR and Depth Tolerance 197 8.2.5.2 Surface Quality 198 8.2.6 Photochemical Machining (Spray Etching) 199 8.3 Thermoelectric Machining Processes 201 8.3.1 Electric Discharge Machining (EDM) 201 8.3.2 Electrical Discharge Milling of SSs and SAs 204 8.3.2.1 Fields of Applications of ED]Milling 204 8.3.2.2 Advantages and Limitations of ED]Milling 205 8.3.3 Electron Beam Machining 206 8.3.4 Laser Beam Machining 206 8.3.5 Plasma Arc Cutting 210 8.4 Economical Analysis of ECM and Thermo]electrical Processes of Turbo]machinery Components 211 8.5 Nontraditional Micro]drilling of Deep Holes – a Comparison 214 8.6 Thermally]Assisted Machining of Stainless Steels and Super Alloys 214 8.6.1 Surface Integrity and Removal Rates for TAM of Stainless Steels and Super Alloys 215 8.6.2 Laser Assisted Turning (LAM) of Inconel]718 216 8.6.3 Plasma Assisted Turning (PAT) of Super Alloys and PH]Stainless Steel 217 References 218 9 Current and Recent Developments Regarding Machining of Stainless Steels and Super Alloys 221 9.1 General Considerations 221 9.2 Recent Research Work Related to Traditional Machining of Stainless Steels 222 9.3 Recent Research Works Related to Traditional Machining of Super Alloys 230 9.4 Recent Research Work Related to Nontraditional Machining of Stainless Steels and Super Alloys 242 References 245 Appendix 249 Review Questions 253 Index 265

    £90.86

  • Printed Electronics

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Printed Electronics

    2 in stock

    Book SynopsisThis book provides an overview of the newly emerged and highly interdisciplinary field of printed electronics Provides an overview of the latest developments and research results in the field of printed electronicsTopics addressed include: organic printable electronic materials, inorganic printable electronic materials, printing processes and equipments for electronic manufacturing, printable transistors, printable photovoltaic devices, printable lighting and display, encapsulation and packaging of printed electronic devices, and applications of printed electronicsDiscusses the principles of the above topics, with support of examples and graphic illustrationsServes both as an advanced introductory to the topic and as an aid for professional development into the new fieldIncludes end of chapter references and links to further readingTable of ContentsPreface xii 1 Introduction 1 Zheng Cui 1.1 What is Printed Electronics? 1 1.2 The Importance of Developing Printed Electronics 11 1.3 Multidisciplinary Nature of Printed Electronics 15 1.4 Structure and Content of the Book 17 References 19 2 Organic Printable Electronic Materials 21 Song Qiu and Chunshan Zhou 2.1 Introduction 21 2.2 Organic Conductive Materials 22 2.2.1 Characteristics of Organic Conductive Materials 22 2.2.2 History of Organic Conductive Materials 23 2.2.3 Conductive Polymer 23 2.2.3.1 Structural Conductive Polymer 23 2.2.3.2 Composite Conductive Polymer 25 2.2.4 PEDOT 25 2.3 Printable Organic Small Molecular Semiconductors 27 2.3.1 Fused Aromatic Compounds 28 2.3.2 Heterocyclic Sulfur Compounds and Oligothiophenes 30 2.3.3 Other Materials with High Mobility 33 2.4 Printable Polymeric Semiconductor 34 2.4.1 P‐type Polymer Semiconductors 35 2.4.1.1 Sulfur‐containing Heterocyclic Polymeric Semiconductors 35 2.4.1.2 Phenyl‐containing Polymeric Semiconductors 37 2.4.1.3 Other p‐type Polymeric Semiconductors 39 2.4.2 N‐type Polymer Semiconductors 39 2.4.3 Ambipolar Transistor and Related Polymer Materials 41 2.4.4 Outlook 43 2.5 Other Printable Organic Electronic Materials 44 2.5.1 Organic Insulating Materials 44 2.5.2 Organic Materials for Sensors 47 2.6 Summary 49 References 49 3 Inorganic Printable Electronic Materials 54 Zheng Chen 3.1 Introduction 54 3.2 Metallic Materials 56 3.2.1 Metallic Ink 56 3.2.2 Post‐printing Process 63 3.2.3 Metal Nanowire 64 3.3 Transparent Oxide 66 3.3.1 Transparent Oxide Semiconductor and Conductor 66 3.3.2 Low Temperature Solution Processing 68 3.3.3 Doped Transparent Oxide Nanoparticles 71 3.4 Single‐wall Carbon Nanotube 72 3.4.1 Preparation and Selective Chemistry of SWNT 72 3.4.2 Purification of SWNT 76 3.4.3 Metallic SWNT Thin Film 77 3.4.4 Semiconducting SWNT Thin Film 79 3.5 Graphene 83 3.6 Silicon and Germanium 86 3.7 Metal Chalcogenides Semiconductor and Quantum Dots 90 3.7.1 Metal Chalcogenides Semiconductor 90 3.7.2 Quantum Dots 90 3.8 Nanoparticle/Polymer Dielectric Composites 92 3.9 Summary 95 References 96 4 Printing Processes and Equipments 106 Jian Lin 4.1 Introduction 106 4.2 Jet Printing 108 4.2.1 Inkjet Printing 108 4.2.1.1 Working Principles 108 4.2.1.2 Pattern Preparation 108 4.2.1.3 Application in Printed Electronics 110 4.2.2 Aerosol Jet Printing 111 4.2.2.1 Working Principle 112 4.2.2.2 Pattern Preparation 112 4.2.2.3 Advantages and Challenges 113 4.2.3 Electrohydrodynamic Jet Printing 114 4.2.4 Advantages and Disadvantages 114 4.3 Direct Replicate Printing 115 4.3.1 Screen Printing 116 4.3.1.1 Working Principle 116 4.3.1.2 Screen Mask 117 4.3.1.3 Advantages and Disadvantages 118 4.3.1.4 Applications 118 4.3.2 Gravure Printing 118 4.3.2.1 Principle and System 118 4.3.2.2 Gravure Plate 120 4.3.2.3 Advantages and Disadvantages 120 4.3.2.4 Applications in Printed Electronics 121 4.3.3 Flexographic Printing 122 4.3.3.1 Principle and System 122 4.3.3.2 Printing Plate 123 4.3.3.3 Advantages and Disadvantages 123 4.3.3.4 Applications in Printed Electronics 125 4.4 Indirect Replicate Printing 125 4.4.1 Offset Printing 125 4.4.2 Gravure Offset Printing 126 4.4.3 Pad Printing 128 4.5 Pre‐printing Processes 129 4.5.1 Pattern Design 129 4.5.2 Modification of Surface Energy 130 4.5.3 Surface Coating 131 4.5.4 Embossing and Nanoimprinting 131 4.6 Post‐printing Processes 134 4.6.1 Sintering 134 4.6.2 UV Curing 135 4.6.3 Annealing 135 4.7 Summary 136 References 137 5 Printed Thin Film Transistors 145 Jianwen Zhao 5.1 Introduction 145 5.2 Types of Transistors 146 5.3 Working Principles of Transistors 147 5.3.1 Basic Mechanism of MOSFETs 147 5.3.2 Charge Carriers and Carrier Mobility 149 5.3.3 Basic Parameters of TFT 149 5.3.3.1 Effective Mobility 149 5.3.3.2 Operating Voltage 151 5.3.3.3 Device Capacitance 151 5.3.3.4 Threshold Voltage (Vt) 153 5.3.3.5 Subthreshold Swing (SS) 155 5.3.3.6 On/off Current Ratio (Ion/Ioff) 155 5.3.3.7 Hysteresis 156 5.3.3.8 Transconductance (gm) 157 5.3.3.9 Stability 157 5.4 Structures and Fabrication of TFTs 157 5.4.1 Structures of TFTs 157 5.4.2 Characteristics of TFTs 159 5.4.3 Fabrication of TFTs 160 5.4.3.1 Fabrication of Electrodes 160 5.4.3.2 Fabrication of Active Layer 163 5.4.3.3 Fabrication of Dielectric Layers 167 5.5 Fully Printed TFTs 172 5.5.1 Printability of Electronic Materials 172 5.5.2 Influence of Surface Morphology 173 5.5.3 Interface Effect of Printed TFTs 173 5.5.3.1 Effect of Semiconductor/Dielectric Interface 175 5.5.3.2 Effect of Semiconductor/Semiconductor Interface 176 5.5.3.3 Effect of Semiconductor/Electrode Interface 177 5.5.4 Effect of Channel Length 178 5.5.5 Summary of Issues in Printing TFTs 179 5.5.5.1 Printable Inks and Printing Processes 179 5.5.5.2 Printed Electrodes 180 5.5.5.3 Printed Dielectric Thin Films 180 5.6 Advances in Printed TFTs 180 5.6.1 Printed Inorganic TFTs 181 5.6.1.1 SWCNT TFTs 181 5.6.1.2 Metal Oxide TFTs 182 5.6.1.3 Metal Dichalcogenide and Graphene TFTs 184 5.6.2 Printed Organic TFTs 187 5.7 Basics of Printed Logic Circuits 189 5.7.1 NAND and NOR Gates 190 5.7.2 Inverter 190 5.7.3 Ring Oscillator 190 5.7.4 Flip‐flop 193 5.7.5 Backplane Driving Circuits for Display 194 5.8 Summary 196 References 197 6 Printed Organic Thin Film Solar Cells 201 Changqi Ma 6.1 Introduction 201 6.1.1 Solar Energy and its Utilization 201 6.1.2 Classification of Solar Cells 202 6.1.3 A Brief History of Organic Thin‐Film Solar Cells 203 6.2 Working Principles and Characterization of Organic Solar Cells 205 6.2.1 Physical Processes 205 6.2.2 Basic Structure 206 6.2.3 Characterization 208 6.2.3.1 I‐V Characteristics 208 6.2.3.2 Spectrum Response 209 6.2.4 The Main Factors Influencing Device Performance 209 6.2.4.1 Photon Absorption Ability of Organic Semiconductors 210 6.2.4.2 Energy Level Arrangement of Donor and Acceptor 210 6.2.4.3 Morphology of Photoactive Layer 212 6.3 Materials for Organic Solar Cells 213 6.3.1 Transparent Substrate 214 6.3.2 Transparent Conductive Electrode 214 6.3.2.1 Metal Oxide Film 214 6.3.2.2 Conductive Polymer Film 215 6.3.2.3 Thin Metal Film and Metal Grid 215 6.3.2.4 Carbon‐rich Materials 217 6.3.3 Organic Semiconductor Materials 218 6.3.3.1 p‐Type Organic Semiconductors 218 6.3.3.2 n‐Type Organic Semiconductors 223 6.3.4 Inorganic Semiconductors 227 6.3.5 Other Functional Materials 229 6.4 Inverted and Tandem Organic Solar Cells 229 6.4.1 Inverted Organic Solar Cells 229 6.4.2 Tandem Organic Solar Cells 231 6.4.3 Inverted Tandem Organic Solar Cells 231 6.5 Fabrication Methods 232 6.5.1 Spin Coating 233 6.5.2 Doctor Blading 235 6.5.3 Screen Printing 235 6.5.4 Inkjet Printing 237 6.5.5 Other Thin Film Deposition Techniques 237 6.6 Roll‐to‐roll Processing 237 6.7 Printable Perovskite Solar Cells 239 6.8 Summary and Outlook 239 References 240 7 Printed Organic Light Emission and Display 251 Wenming Su 7.1 Introduction 251 7.1.1 Overview of Lighting and Display 252 7.1.2 Overview of Organic Light Emitting Diodes (OLEDs) 253 7.2 Mechanism of Organic Light Emission 254 7.2.1 Charge Injection and Transport 255 7.2.2 Exciton Formation and Light Emission 256 7.2.3 Characterization of OLED Performance 256 7.2.3.1 Luminous Efficacy 256 7.2.3.2 Quantum Efficiency 257 7.2.3.3 Color 257 7.2.3.4 Three Primary Colors 258 7.3 Structures and Materials of OLED 259 7.3.1 Small Molecular OLED 259 7.3.1.1 Typical Structure 259 7.3.1.2 Electrode Materials 259 7.3.1.3 Fabrication Process 260 7.3.2 Polymer OLEDs 262 7.3.3 General OLED Materials 262 7.3.3.1 Charge Injection Materials 263 7.3.3.2 Charge Transport Materials 263 7.3.3.3 Emitter Materials 264 7.3.4 Soluble OLED Materials 265 7.3.4.1 Printable Polymer OLEDs 266 7.3.4.2 Printable Small Molecular OLEDs 266 7.3.4.3 Cross‐linking Materials for Printable OLEDs 267 7.4 White Lighting OLEDs 267 7.4.1 White Light Emission Mechanism 267 7.4.2 Important Parameters 272 7.4.2.1 CRI 272 7.4.2.2 Efficiency and Light Extraction 273 7.4.2.3 Lifetime 275 7.4.3 Investment in OLED Lighting 275 7.5 Fabrication of OLED by Printing 277 7.5.1 Spin and Slot Die Coating 277 7.5.2 Inkjet Printing 278 7.5.3 Screen Printing 278 7.5.4 Roll‐to‐roll Printing 279 7.5.5 Current Status of the Printed OLED Industry 280 7.6 Summary 281 References 282 8 Encapsulation Technology for Organic Electronic Devices 287 Wenming Su 8.1 Introduction 287 8.2 Aging of Organic Electronic Devices 288 8.2.1 Characteristics and Mechanisms of Aging 288 8.2.2 Requirements for Organic Electronics Encapsulation 290 8.3 Principle of Encapsulation 291 8.3.1 Water/oxygen Penetration Mechanism through Thin Films 291 8.3.2 Organic/inorganic Multilayer Encapsulation 292 8.3.3 Measurement of Encapsulation Property 293 8.4 Thin‐film Encapsulation Technology 296 8.4.1 History of Thin‐film Encapsulation 297 8.4.2 Single Layer Thin‐film Encapsulation 298 8.4.3 Multilayer Thin‐film Encapsulation 298 8.4.4 BarixTM Thin‐film Encapsulation 300 8.4.5 Thin Film Deposition Methods 301 8.4.5.1 PECVD 301 8.4.5.2 ALD 303 8.4.5.3 Parylene Deposition 303 8.4.6 Flexibility of Encapsulation Thin Film 304 8.4.7 Trends of Thin‐film Encapsulation 306 8.5 Applications of Thin‐film Encapsulation 307 8.5.1 Encapsulation of Flexible OLED 307 8.5.2 Encapsulation of Flexible OPV 309 8.6 Summary 313 References 314 9 Applications and Future Prospects of Printed Electronics 316 Zheng Cui 9.1 Introduction 316 9.2 Application Areas of Printed Electronics 317 9.2.1 Organic Photovoltaic 317 9.2.2 Flexible Display 321 9.2.3 Organic Lighting 324 9.2.4 Electronics and Components 326 9.2.5 Integrated Smart Systems 331 9.3 Challenges for Printed Electronics 333 9.3.1 Materials 333 9.3.2 Printing Process and Equipment 335 9.3.3 Encapsulation 335 9.3.4 Design Methodology and Standardization 336 9.4 Summary and Outlook 336 References 337 Index 339

    2 in stock

    £114.26

  • Engineering Economics for the 21st Century

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Engineering Economics for the 21st Century

    3 in stock

    Book SynopsisProvides a modern presentation that eliminates the seven limitations of past and present engineering economics texts: Contains the12-FACTORCalculator, an Excel spreadsheet designed by author to provide the values of the 12 factors of engineering economics forarbitraryvalues ofi,g( ), andNContains theANNUALandPRESENT WORTH COMPARISON Calculators with Component Replacementsforcomparing equipment purchase quotationsDefines quasi-simple investments and presents a Step-by-Step procedure for calculating their IRRs and balancesPresents a classification of the four common non-simple investments and provides Step-by-Step procedures for calculating their IRRs and balancesCompares the different profitability measures for thesameinvestment: pretax IRR, aftertax IRR, aftertax sensitivity analysis, net present value, accounting rate of return, benefit-cost ratio, and payback periodTable of ContentsPreface VII 1 Overview of Engineering Economics 1.1 Why Study Engineering Economics 1 1.2 Text Objectives 2 2 Foundation of Engineering Economics 2.1 Loan Elements 2.1.1 Monies Transferred 3 2.1.2 Balances, Interest Rate & Total Interest 4 2.1.3 Interest Rate Specifications 5 2.1.4 Analogy Between Loans & Rentals 6 2.2 Cash Flows 2.2.1 Definitions 7 2.2.2 Cash Flow Diagram 7 2.3 Fundamental Repayment Equation 2.3.1 Definitions 8 2.3.2 Derivation 9 2.3.3 Total & Normalized Total Interests 10 2.3.4 Using the Fundamental Repayment Equation 10 2.4 Worth, Factors & Equivalence 2.4.1 Worths of a Cash Flow 14 2.4.2 Factors for a Cash Flow 16 2.4.3 12-FACTOR Calculator 18 2.4.4 Present & Future Worths of a Series 19 2.4.5 Equivalence 20 2.5 General Repayment Equation (GRE) 2.5.1 Balance Equation 21 2.5.2 Derivation of the GRE 22 2.5.3 Total Interest Equation 23 2.5.4 Applications of the GRE 24 2.6 Uniform Series Factors & Uniform Worth Factors of a Cash Flow 2.6.1 Present Worth Factor 26 2.6.2 Future Worth Factor 29 2.6.3 Uniform Worth of a Present Cash Flow 30 2.6.4 Uniform Worth of a Future Cash Flow 33 2.6.5 Shifted Basic Series 36 2.7 Gradient Series Factors 2.7.1 Present Worth Factor 39 2.7.2 Future Worth Factor 43 2.7.3 Uniform Worth of a Gradient Series 43 2.8 Geometric Gradient Series Factors 2.8.1 Present Worth Factor 46 2.8.2 Net Present Worth Factor 48 2.8.3 Future Worth Factor 50 2.8.4 Uniform Worth of a Geometric Gradient Series 51 2.9 Rate of Return of a Simple Investment 2.9.1 Comparison of Loans & Investments 53 2.9.2 Rate of Return of an Investment 54 2.9.3 Simple Investments 56 2.10 Calculating the IRR% with Excel 2.10.1 IRR Function 57 2.10.2 Spreadsheet Cells 59 2.10.3 Goal Seek Command 59 2.11 Classification of the Examples 60 2.12 Developing the 12-FACTOR Calculator 2.12.1 Creating the 12-Factor Functions in Excel 61 2.12.2 12-FACTOR Calculator 62 2.12.3 Excel’s Three Factor Functions 63 2.13 Summary 64 2.14 Problems 65 3 Intermediate Balances and Other Interest Rates & Series 3.1 Intermediate Balances 3.3.1 Intermediate Balance Equations 69 3.1.2 Annual Interests of a Home Mortgage 71 3.1.3 Recursive Calculation of Intermediate Balances 74 3.2 Other Interest Rates 3.2.1 Annual Percentage Yield 76 3.2.2 Simple Interest 78 3.2.3 Continuous Compounding 79 3.3 Composite Series 3.3.1 Introduction 81 3.3.2 Decreasing Linear Series 83 3.3.3 Composite Series Transformation Procedure 84 3.4 Summary 86 3.5 Problems 86 4 Annual Worth Comparisons 4.1 Introduction 4.1.1 Definitions 89 4.1.2 Rationale & Consistency of Annual Worth Comparisons 90 4.2 Specified Service Time 4.2.1 Introduction 91 4.2.2 ANNUAL WORTH COMPARISON Calculator 92 4.2.3 Using the ANNUAL WORTH COMPARISON Calculator 93 4.2.4 Component Replacement Costs 94 4.2.5 Adding Component Replacement Costs to the ANNUAL WORTH COMPARISON Calculator 95 4.2.6 Effect of the MARR on a Least-Cost Study 96 4.3 Indefinite Service Time 4.3.1 Least Common Multiple 97 4.3.2 Repeatability Assumption 98 4.3.3 Comparison of Specified & LCM Service Times 99 4.3.4 Disadvantages of the LCM Service Time 101 4.4 Other Cost Alternatives 4.4.1 Extra Capacity Versus Staged Construction 101 4.4.2 Dissimilar Alternatives 104 4.4.3 Irregular Alternatives 105 4.5 Perpetual Service Time 4.5.1 Definition 107 4.5.2 Three Annual Worth Limits 107 4.6 Annual Worth Investment Calculations 109 4.6 Summary 111 4.7 Problems 112 5 Present Worth Comparisons 5.1 Specified Service Time 5.1.1 Present Worths Without Replacement Costs 117 5.1.2 PRESENT WORTH COMPARISON Calculator 119 5.1.3 Using the PRESENT WORTH COMPARISON Calculator 119 5.1.4 Component Replacement Costs 120 5.1.5 Adding Component Replacement Costs to the PRESENT WORTH COMPARISON Calculator 122 5.2 Other Cost Alternatives 5.2.1 Extra Capacity & Staged Construction Alternatives 123 5.2.2 Dissimilar & Irregular Alternatives 124 5.3 Perpetual Service Time 5.3.1 Definitions 124 5.3.2 Capitalized Costs of the Basic Series 125 5.3.3 Comparison of Annual Worth Limits & Capitalized Costs 125 5.4 Present Worth Investment Calculations 127 5.5 Choosing a Worth Calculation Method 5.5.1 Least-Cost Studies 129 5.5.2 Other Calculations 129 5.6 Summary 129 5.7 Problems 130 6 Simple and Quasi-Simple Investments 6.1 Simple Investments: A Quick Review 6.1.1 Definition 133 6.1.2 Properties 134 6.2 IRR% of a Manufacturing Plant Investment & End-of-Year Convention 6.2.1 Disbursement Classes 135 6.2.2 Cash Flow Timing 136 6.2.3 End-of-Year Convention 136 6.2.4 Pretax IRR% of a Chemical Plant Investment (SI-Class) 138 6.3 Simple Cost Reduction Investments 6.3.1 Definition 141 6.3.2 Calculating the IRR% (SI-Class) 141 6.4 Multi-Simple Investments 6.4.1 Definitions, Properties & Occurrences 142 6.4.2 IRR of a Quasi-Simple Investment (QSI-Class) 143 6.5 Creating a Polynomial Root Finder in Mathematica 6.5.1 Creating the polyRoots Function 146 6.5.2 Using the polyRoots Function 147 6.6 Incremental Investment Criterion 148 6.7 Summary 149 6.7 Problems 149 7 Non-Simple Investments 7.1 Five Fundamental Properties of Simple & Quasi-Simple Investments 7.1.1 Negative First Cash Flow 153 7.1.2 Positive Last Cash Flow 153 7.1.3 Odd Number of Cash Flow Sign Changes 154 7.1.4 Unique Rate of Rate of Return 154 7.1.5 Positive Balances 154 7.1.6 Fundamental Properties of the Four Basic Non-Simple Investments 154 7.2 Down Payment Investments 7.2.1 Definition, Properties & Occurrence 154 7.2.2 Finding the RORs of a Down Payment Investment 155 7.2.3 Meaning of Negative Balances 157 7.2.4 Mixed Down Payment Investment 157 7.2.5 Properties of a Mixed Down Payment Investment 159 7.3 Termination Investments 7.3.1 Definition, Properties & Occurrence 161 7.3.2 Mixed Termination Investment 162 7.4 Down Payment & Termination Investments 7.4.1 Definition, Properties & Occurrence 164 7.4.2 Mixed Down Payment & Termination Investment 165 7.5 Bi-Simple & Tri-Simple Investments 7.5.1 Definition, Properties & Occurrences 167 7.5.2 Mixed Bi-Simple Investment 167 7.5.3 Mixed Tri-Simple Investments: Two Simple Internal Investments 170 7.6 Summary 171 7.7 Problems 172 8 Mutually Exclusive Investments 8.1 Comparing Two Simple Mutually Exclusive Investments 8.1.1 Definitions 175 8.1.2 Basic MEI Selection Model 176 8.1.3 Relationships Between the Three IRRs 178 8.2 Comparing Three or More Mutually Exclusive Investments 8.2.1 General MEI Selection Procedure 180 8.2.2 Relative Values of the Challenger-Defender IRRs 182 8.2.3 Effect of the MARR on an MEI Study 182 8.3 Equal Initial Cash Flows 183 8.4 Summary 184 8.5 Problems 184 9 After Tax IRR% 9.1 Income Taxes & Depreciation 9.1.1 Combined Income Tax Rate 187 9.1.2 Taxable Income, Income Tax & After Tax Cash Flow 188 9.1.3 Depreciation Expenses 188 9.2 MACRS Depreciation 9.2.1 Percentage Depreciations 191 9.2.2 Net Recovered Capital 191 9.2.3 Calculating an After Tax IRR% 192 9.3 Start-Up Cost & Time 9.3.1 Definitions 192 9.3.2 Percentage Depreciations 192 9.3.3 Calculating the After Tax IRR% with a Start-Up Time 194 9.4 Straight Line Depreciation 194 9.5 Book Depreciation Methods 9.5.1 Straight Line Depreciation 197 9.5.2 Double Declining Balance Depreciation 198 9.5.3 Sum-of-Years-Digits Depreciation 200 9.6 Brief History of U.S. Tax Laws 203 9.7 Summary 203 9.8 Problems 203 10 Sensitivity Analysis 10.1 Creating an IRR% Sensitivity Table 208 10.2 Staged Construction & Break Even Point 211 10.3 Summary 212 10.4 Problems 213 Chapter 11 Other Profitability Measures 11.1 Net Present Value 11.1.1 A 15 Second Review of Calculating an IRR 215 11.1.2 Screening the IRR with a Net Present Value Calculation 216 11.1.3 Calculating a Net Present Value with Excel 216 11.1.4 Comparing Two or More Mutually Exclusive Investments 217 11.2 Accounting Rate of Return 219 11.3 Benefit Cost Ratio 220 11.4 Payback Period 11.4.1 Definition & Calculation 221 11.4.2 Rationale for the Payback Period 222 11.5 Investment Information Package 224 11.6 Summary 224 11.7 Problems 225 Index 227

    3 in stock

    £108.86

  • Pumping Machinery Theory and Practice

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Pumping Machinery Theory and Practice

    Book SynopsisPumping Machinery Theory and Practice comprehensively covers the theoretical foundation and applications of pumping machinery. It covers characteristics of centrifugal pumps, axial flow pumps and displacement pumps and considers pumping machinery performance and operational-type problems.Table of ContentsPreface xi Nomenclature xiii 1 Essentials of Fluid Mechanics 1 1.1 Kinematics of Fluid Flow 1 1.2 Conservation Principles 4 1.3 Some Important Applications 8 1.4 Dimensionless Numbers 12 1.5 Laminar and Turbulent Flows 12 1.6 Flow Separation 13 1.7 Cavitation 13 1.8 Friction Losses in Pipes and Pipe Fittings 14 References 21 2 Introduction and Basic Considerations 29 2.1 Introduction 29 2.2 Basic Definitions and Terminology 37 2.3 Determination of Flow Rate in a Pumping System 45 2.4 Operation of Pumps in Parallel and in Series 51 2.5 Similitude Applied to Centrifugal and Axial Flow Pumps 55 2.6 Flow Rate Control in Dynamic Pump Systems 62 2.7 Pump Specific Speed 65 References 72 3 Fundamentals of Energy Transfer in Centrifugal Pumps 81 3.1 Main Components of the Centrifugal Pump 81 3.2 Energy Transfer from the Pump Rotor to the Fluid 88 3.3 Theoretical Characteristic Curves 93 3.4 Deviation from Theoretical Characteristics 99 3.5 Leakage Losses 105 3.6 Mechanical Losses 106 3.7 Relationship between the Overall Efficiency and Other Efficiencies 111 3.8 Flow Rate Control in Pumping Systems 118 References 126 4 Axial and Radial Thrusts in Centrifugal Pumps 133 4.1 Introduction 133 4.2 Axial Thrust 133 4.3 Methods of Balancing the Axial Thrust 135 4.4 Radial Thrust 144 References 153 5 Common Problems in Centrifugal Pumps 159 5.1 Introduction 159 5.2 Cavitation 160 5.3 Mechanism of Cavitation Erosion 179 5.4 Solid Particle Erosion 180 5.5 Pump Surge 180 5.6 Operation at Other Than the Normal Capacity 183 5.7 Temperature Rise of Pumped Fluid 186 5.8 Change of Pump Performance with Fluid Viscosity 189 5.9 Rotating Stall in Centrifugal Pumps 190 5.10 Pump Vibration 191 5.11 Vibration Measurements 193 5.12 Vibration Signal Analysis 194 References 198 6 Axial Flow Pumps 205 6.1 Introduction 205 6.2 Definitions and General Considerations 205 6.3 Pump Theoretical Head and the Mean Effective Radius 210 6.4 Performance Characteristics of Axial-Flow Pumps 212 6.5 Axial Thrust in Axial Flow Pumps 213 6.6 Flow Rate Control in Axial Flow Pumps 214 References 218 7 Displacement Pumps 221 7.1 Introduction 221 7.2 Reciprocating Pumps 222 7.3 Pressure Variation during Suction and Delivery Strokes 225 7.4 Use of Air Vessels in Reciprocating Pump Systems 230 7.5 Performance Characteristics of Reciprocating Pumps 232 7.6 Flow Rate Control 234 7.7 Rotary Pumps 242 References 251 8 Introduction to Fans and Compressors 255 8.1 Introduction 255 8.2 Centrifugal Fans 256 8.3 Some Basic Concepts of High Speed Flow 262 8.4 Introduction to Centrifugal Compressors and Basic Considerations 272 8.5 Some Inlet Design Considerations 274 8.6 One-Dimensional Flow Analysis 276 8.7 Effect of Circulatory Flow (Slip) 279 8.8 Pressure Rise and Efficiencies 284 8.9 Sources of Losses in Centrifugal Compressors 286 8.10 Compressor Performance Characteristics 287 8.11 Compressor Surge 288 8.12 Choking in Centrifugal Compressors 291 8.13 Flow Rate Control in Centrifugal Compressors 293 References 299 9 Multiphase Flow Pumping 305 9.1 Introduction 305 9.2 Multiphase Flow through Centrifugal Pumps 333 9.3 Multiphase Pumping for the Oil and Gas Industry 340 9.4 Airlift Pump: an Example of Non-Conventional Pumping 345 References 353 10 Pump Selection Guidelines 357 10.1 Introduction 357 10.2 Bases of Pump Selection 358 10.3 Selection Based on Type of Pumped Fluid 358 10.4 Selection Based on Operating Condition 359 10.5 Selection Based on Reliability and Maintainability 361 10.6 Selection Based on Initial and Operating Cost 362 10.7 Other Factors Affecting Pump Selection 362 References 363 Index 365

    £84.56

  • Sustainable Aviation Technology and Operations

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Sustainable Aviation Technology and Operations

    Book SynopsisSustainable Aviation Technology and Operations Comprehensively covers research and development initiatives to enhance the environmental sustainability of the aviation sector Sustainable Aviation Technology and Operations provides a comprehensive and timely outlook of recent research advances in aeronautics and air transport, with emphasis on both long-term sustainable development goals and current achievements. This book discusses some of the most promising advances in aircraft technologies, air traffic management and systems engineering methodologies for sustainable aviation. The topics covered include: propulsion, aerodynamics, avionics, structures, materials, airspace management, biofuels and sustainable lifecycle management. The physical processes associated with various aircraft emissions including air pollutants, noise and contrails are presented to support the development of computational models for aircraft design, flight path optimization and eTable of ContentsList of Contributors vii About the Editors ix About the Companion Website x 1 Sustainable Aviation: An Introduction 1 Roberto Sabatini and Alessandro Gardi Section I Aviation Sustainability Fundamentals 29 2 Climate Impacts of Aviation 31 Yixiang Lim, Alessandro Gardi, and Roberto Sabatini 3 Noise Pollution and Other Environmental and Health Impacts of Aviation 49 Alessandro Gardi, Rohan Kapoor, Yixiang Lim, and Roberto Sabatini Section II Systems for Sustainable Aviation 79 4 Systems Engineering Evolutions 81 Anthony Zanetti, Arun Kumar, Alessandro Gardi, and Roberto Sabatini 5 Life Cycle Assessment for Carbon Neutrality 113 Enda Crossin, Alessandro Gardi, and Roberto Sabatini 6 Air Traffic Management and Avionics Systems Evolutions 145 Alessandro Gardi, Yixiang Lim, Nichakorn Pongsakornsathien, Roberto Sabatini, and Trevor Kistan 7 Optimisation of Flight Trajectories and Airspace 165 Alessandro Gardi, Yixiang Lim, and Roberto Sabatini Section III Aerostructures and Propulsive Technologies 213 8 Advanced Aerodynamic Configurations 215 Matthew Marino, Alessandro Gardi, Roberto Sabatini, and Yixiang Lim 9 Lightweight Structures and Advanced Materials 241 Raj Das and Joel Galos 10 Low-Emission Propulsive Technologies in Transport Aircraft 263 Kavindu Ranasinghe, Kai Guan, Alessandro Gardi, and Roberto Sabatini 11 Approved Drop-in Biofuels and Prospects for Alternative Aviation Fuels 301 Graham Dorrington Section IV Research Case Studies 323 12 Overall Contribution of Wingtip Devices to Improving Aircraft Performance 325 Nikola Gavrilovi´c, Boško Rašuo, Vladimir Parezanovi´c, George Dulikravich, and Jean-Marc Moschetta 13 Integration of Naturally Occurring Materials in Lightweight Aerostructures 343 Jose Silva, Alessandro Gardi, and Roberto Sabatini 14 Distributed and Hybrid Propulsion: A Tailored Design Methodology 355 Martin Burston, Kavindu Ranasinghe, Alessandro Gardi, Vladimir Parezanovic, Rafic Ajaj, and Roberto Sabatini 15 Integration of Hybrid-Electric Propulsion Systems in Small Unmanned Aircraft 393 Jacob Sliwinski, Alessandro Gardi, Matthew Marino, and Roberto Sabatini 16 Benefits and Challenges of Liquid Hydrogen Fuels for Commercial Transport Aircraft 417 Stephen Rondinelli, Alessandro Gardi, and Roberto Sabatini 17 Multi-Objective Trajectory Optimisation Algorithms for Avionics and ATM Systems 433 Alessandro Gardi, Roberto Sabatini, and Trevor Kistan 18 Energy-Optimal 4D Guidance and Control for Terminal Descent Operations 457 Yixiang Lim, Alessandro Gardi, and Roberto Sabatini 19 Contrail Modelling for 4D Trajectory Optimisation 475 Yixiang Lim, Alessandro Gardi, and Roberto Sabatini 20 Trajectory Optimisation to Minimise the Combined Radiative Forcing Impacts of Contrails and CO2 499 Yixiang Lim, Alessandro Gardi, Roberto Sabatini, and Trevor Kistan 21 The W Life Cycle Model – San Francisco Airport Case Study 509 Anthony Zanetti, Alessandro Gardi, and Roberto Sabatini 22 Conclusions and Future Research 517 Roberto Sabatini and Alessandro Gardi Index 523

    £84.50

  • Flight Dynamics and Control of Aero and Space

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Flight Dynamics and Control of Aero and Space

    Book SynopsisFlight Vehicle Dynamics and Control Rama K. Yedavalli, The Ohio State University, USA A comprehensive textbook which presents flight vehicle dynamics and control in a unified framework Flight Vehicle Dynamics and Controlpresents the dynamics and control of various flight vehicles, including aircraft, spacecraft, helicopter, missiles, etc, in a unified framework. It covers the fundamental topics in the dynamics and control of these flight vehicles, highlighting shared points as well as differences in dynamics and control issues, making use of the systems level' viewpoint. The book begins with the derivation of the equations of motion for a general rigid body and then delineates the differences between the dynamics of various flight vehicles in a fundamental way. It then focuses on the dynamic equations with application to these various flight vehicles, concentrating more on aircraft and spacecraft cases. Then the control systems analysis and design is carried out both from transfer fTable of ContentsPreface xxi Perspective of the Book xxix Part I Flight Vehicle Dynamics 1 Roadmap to Part I 2 1 An Overview of the Fundamental Concepts of Modeling of a Dynamic System 5 1.1 Chapter Highlights 5 1.2 Stages of a Dynamic System Investigation and Approximations 5 1.3 Concepts Needed to Derive Equations of Motion 8 1.4 Illustrative Example 15 1.5 Further Insight into Absolute Acceleration 20 1.6 Chapter Summary 20 1.7 Exercises 21 Bibliography 22 2 Basic Nonlinear Equations of Motion in Three Dimensional Space 23 2.1 Chapter Highlights 23 2.2 Derivation of Equations of Motion for a General Rigid Body 23 2.3 Specialization of Equations of Motion to Aero (Atmospheric) Vehicles 32 2.4 Specialization of Equations of Motion to Spacecraft 43 2.5 Flight Vehicle DynamicModels in State Space Representation 52 2.6 Chapter Summary 58 2.7 Exercises 58 Bibliography 60 3 Linearization and Stability of Linear Time Invariant Systems 61 3.1 Chapter Highlights 61 3.2 State Space Representation of Dynamic Systems 61 3.3 Linearizing a Nonlinear State Space Model 63 3.4 Uncontrolled, Natural Dynamic Response and Stability of First and Second Order Linear Dynamic Systems with State Space Representation 66 3.5 Chapter Summary 73 3.6 Exercises 74 Bibliography 75 4 Aircraft Static Stability and Control 77 4.1 Chapter Highlights 77 4.2 Analysis of Equilibrium (Trim) Flight for Aircraft: Static Stability and Control 77 4.3 Static Longitudinal Stability 79 4.4 Stick Fixed Neutral Point and CG Travel Limits 86 4.5 Static Longitudinal Control with Elevator Deflection 92 4.6 Reversible Flight Control Systems: Stick Free, Stick Force Considerations 99 4.7 Static Directional Stability and Control 105 4.8 Engine Out Rudder/Aileron Power Determination: Minimum Control Speed, VMC 107 4.9 Chapter Summary 111 4.10 Exercises 111 Bibliography 114 5 Aircraft Dynamic Stability and Control via Linearized Models 117 5.1 Chapter Highlights 117 5.2 Analysis of Perturbed Flight from Trim: Aircraft Dynamic Stability and Control 117 5.3 Linearized Equations of Motion in Terms of Stability Derivatives For the Steady, Level Equilibrium Condition 122 5.4 State Space Representation for Longitudinal Motion and Modes of Approximation 124 5.5 State Space Representation for Lateral/Directional Motion and Modes of Approximation 131 5.6 Chapter Summary 138 5.7 Exercises 139 Bibliography 140 6 Spacecraft Passive Stabilization and Control 143 6.1 Chapter Highlights 143 6.2 Passive Methods for Satellite Attitude Stabilization and Control 143 6.3 Stability Conditions for Linearized Models of Single Spin Stabilized Satellites 146 6.4 Stability Conditions for a Dual Spin Stabilized Satellite 149 6.5 Chapter Summary 151 6.6 Exercises 152 Bibliography 152 7 Spacecraft Dynamic Stability and Control via Linearized Models 155 7.1 Chapter Highlights 155 7.2 Active Control: Three Axis Stabilization and Control 155 7.3 Linearized Translational Equations of Motion for a Satellite in a Nominal Circular Orbit for Control Design 158 7.4 Linearized Rotational (Attitude) Equations of Motion for a Satellite in a Nominal Circular Orbit for Control Design 160 7.5 Open Loop (Uncontrolled Motion) Behavior of Spacecraft Models 161 7.6 External Torque Analysis: Control Torques Versus Disturbance Torques 161 7.7 Chapter Summary 162 7.8 Exercises 162 Bibliography 163 Part II Fight Vehicle Control via Classical Transfer Function Based Methods 165 Roadmap to Part II 166 8 Transfer Function Based Linear Control Systems 169 8.1 Chapter Highlights 169 8.2 Poles and Zeroes in Transfer Functions and Their Role in the Stability and Time Response of Systems 174 8.3 Transfer Functions for Aircraft Dynamics Application 179 8.4 Transfer Functions for Spacecraft Dynamics Application 183 8.5 Chapter Summary 184 8.6 Exercises 184 Bibliography 186 9 Block Diagram Representation of Control Systems 187 9.1 Chapter Highlights 187 9.2 Standard Block Diagram of a Typical Control System 187 9.3 Time Domain Performance Specifications in Control Systems 192 9.4 Typical Controller Structures in SISO Control Systems 196 9.5 Chapter Summary 200 9.6 Exercises 201 Bibliography 202 10 Stability Testing of Polynomials 203 10.1 Chapter Highlights 203 10.2 Coefficient Tests for Stability: Routh–Hurwitz Criterion 204 10.3 Left Column Zeros of the Array 208 10.4 Imaginary Axis Roots 208 10.5 Adjustable Systems 209 10.6 Chapter Summary 210 10.7 Exercises 210 Bibliography 211 11 Root Locus Technique for Control Systems Analysis and Design 213 11.1 Chapter Highlights 213 11.2 Introduction 213 11.3 Properties of the Root Locus 214 11.4 Sketching the Root Locus 218 11.5 Refining the Sketch 219 11.6 Control Design using the Root Locus Technique 223 11.7 Using MATLAB to Draw the Root Locus 225 11.8 Chapter Summary 226 11.9 Exercises 227 Bibliography 229 12 Frequency Response Analysis and Design 231 12.1 Chapter Highlights 231 12.2 Introduction 231 12.3 Frequency Response Specifications 232 12.4 Advantages of Working with the Frequency Response in Terms of Bode Plots 235 12.5 Examples on Frequency Response 238 12.6 Stability: Gain and Phase Margins 240 12.7 Notes on Lead and Lag Compensation via Bode Plots 246 12.8 Chapter Summary 248 12.9 Exercises 248 Bibliography 250 13 Applications of Classical Control Methods to Aircraft Control 251 13.1 Chapter Highlights 251 13.2 Aircraft Flight Control Systems (AFCS) 252 13.3 Longitudinal Control Systems 252 13.4 Control Theory Application to Automatic Landing Control System Design 259 13.5 Lateral/Directional Autopilots 265 13.6 Chapter Summary 267 Bibliography 267 14 Application of Classical Control Methods to Spacecraft Control 269 14.1 Chapter Highlights 269 14.2 Control of an Earth Observation Satellite Using a Momentum Wheel and Offset Thrusters: Case Study 269 14.3 Chapter Summary 281 Bibliography 281 Part III Flight Vehicle Control via Modern State Space Based Methods 283 Roadmap to Part III 284 15 Time Domain, State Space Control Theory 287 15.1 Chapter Highlights 287 15.2 Introduction to State Space Control Theory 287 15.3 State Space Representation in Companion Form: Continuous Time Systems 291 15.4 State Space Representation of Discrete Time (Difference) Equations 292 15.5 State Space Representation of Simultaneous Differential Equations 294 15.6 State Space Equations from Transfer Functions 296 15.7 Linear Transformations of State Space Representations 297 15.8 Linearization of Nonlinear State Space Systems 300 15.9 Chapter Summary 304 15.10 Exercises 305 Bibliography 306 16 Dynamic Response of Linear State Space Systems (Including Discrete Time Systems and Sampled Data Systems) 307 16.1 Chapter Highlights 307 16.2 Introduction to Dynamic Response: Continuous Time Systems 307 16.3 Solutions of Linear Constant Coefficient Differential Equations in State Space Form 309 16.4 Determination of State Transition Matrices Using the Cayley–Hamilton Theorem 310 16.5 Response of a Constant Coefficient (Time Invariant) Discrete Time State Space System 314 16.6 Discretizing a Continuous Time System: Sampled Data Systems 317 16.7 Chapter Summary 319 16.8 Exercises 320 Bibliography 321 17 Stability of Dynamic Systems with State Space Representation with Emphasis on Linear Systems 323 17.1 Chapter Highlights 323 17.2 Stability of Dynamic Systems via Lyapunov Stability Concepts 323 17.3 Stability Conditions for Linear Time Invariant Systems with State Space Representation 328 17.4 Stability Conditions for Quasi-linear (Periodic) Systems 337 17.5 Stability of Linear, Possibly Time Varying, Systems 338 17.6 Bounded Input–Bounded State Stability (BIBS) and Bounded Input–Bounded Output Stability (BIBO) 344 17.7 Chapter Summary 345 17.8 Exercises 345 Bibliography 346 18 Controllability, Stabilizability, Observability, and Detectability 349 18.1 Chapter Highlights 349 18.2 Controllability of Linear State Space Systems 349 18.3 State Controllability Test via Modal Decomposition 351 18.4 Normality or Normal Linear Systems 352 18.5 Stabilizability of Uncontrollable Linear State Space Systems 353 18.6 Observability of Linear State Space Systems 355 18.7 State Observability Test via Modal Decomposition 357 18.8 Detectability of Unobservable Linear State Space Systems 358 18.9 Implications and Importance of Controllability and Observability 361 18.10 A Display of all Three Structural Properties via Modal Decomposition 365 18.11 Chapter Summary 365 18.12 Exercises 366 Bibliography 368 19 Shaping of Dynamic Response by Control Design: Pole (Eigenvalue) Placement Technique 369 19.1 Chapter Highlights 369 19.2 Shaping of Dynamic Response of State Space Systems using Control Design 369 19.3 Single Input Full State Feedback Case: Ackermann’s Formula for Gain 373 19.4 Pole (Eigenvalue) Assignment using Full State Feedback: MIMO Case 375 19.5 Chapter Summary 379 19.6 Exercises 379 Bibliography 381 20 Linear Quadratic Regulator (LQR) Optimal Control 383 20.1 Chapter Highlights 383 20.2 Formulation of the Optimum Control Problem 383 20.3 Quadratic Integrals and Matrix Differential Equations 385 20.4 The Optimum Gain Matrix 387 20.5 The Steady State Solution 388 20.6 Disturbances and Reference Inputs 389 20.7 Trade-Off Curve Between State Regulation Cost and Control Effort 392 20.8 Chapter Summary 395 20.9 Exercises 395 Bibliography 396 21 Control Design Using Observers 397 21.1 Chapter Highlights 397 21.2 Observers or Estimators and Their Use in Feedback Control Systems 397 21.3 Other Controller Structures: Dynamic Compensators of Varying Dimensions 405 21.4 Spillover Instabilities in Linear State Space Dynamic Systems 408 21.5 Chapter Summary 410 21.6 Exercises 410 Bibliography 410 22 State Space Control Design: Applications to Aircraft Control 413 22.1 Chapter Highlights 413 22.2 LQR Controller Design for Aircraft Control Application 413 22.3 Pole Placement Design for Aircraft Control Application 414 22.4 Chapter Summary 421 22.5 Exercises 421 Bibliography 421 23 State Space Control Design: Applications to Spacecraft Control 423 23.1 Chapter Highlights 423 23.2 Control Design for Multiple Satellite Formation Flying 423 23.3 Chapter Summary 427 23.4 Exercises 428 Bibliography 428 Part IV Other Related Flight Vehicles 429 Roadmap to Part IV 430 24 Tutorial on Aircraft Flight Control by Boeing 433 24.1 Tutorial Highlights 433 24.2 System Overview 433 24.3 System Electrical Power 436 24.4 Control Laws and System Functionality 438 24.5 Tutorial Summary 441 Bibliography 442 25 Tutorial on Satellite Control Systems 443 25.1 Tutorial Highlights 443 25.2 Spacecraft/Satellite Building Blocks 443 25.3 Attitude Actuators 445 25.4 Considerations in Using Momentum Exchange Devices and Reaction Jet Thrusters for Active Control 445 25.5 Tutorial Summary 449 Bibliography 449 26 Tutorial on Other Flight Vehicles 451 26.1 Tutorial on Helicopter (Rotorcraft) Flight Control Systems 451 26.2 Tutorial on Quadcopter Dynamics and Control 462 26.3 Tutorial on Missile Dynamics and Control 465 26.4 Tutorial on Hypersonic Vehicle Dynamics and Control 468 Bibliography 470 Appendices 471 Appendix A Data for Flight Vehicles 472 A.1 Data for Several Aircraft 472 A.2 Data for Selected Satellites 476 Appendix B Brief Review of Laplace Transform Theory 479 B.1 Introduction 479 B.2 Basics of Laplace Transforms 479 B.3 Inverse Laplace Transformation using the Partial Fraction Expansion Method 482 B.4 Exercises 483 Appendix C A Brief Review of Matrix Theory and Linear Algebra 487 C.1 Matrix Operations, Properties, and Forms 487 C.2 Linear Independence and Rank 489 C.3 Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors 490 C.4 Definiteness of Matrices 492 C.5 Singular Values 493 C.6 Vector Norms 497 C.7 Simultaneous Linear Equations 499 C.8 Exercises 501 Bibliography 503 Appendix D Useful MATLAB Commands 505 D.1 Author Supplied Matlab Routine for Formation of Fuller Matrices 505 D.2 Available Standard Matlab Commands 507 Index 509

    £77.85

  • Perovskites

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Perovskites

    Book SynopsisUniquely describes both the crystallography and properties of perovskite related materials. Practical applications in solar cells, microelectronics and telecommunications Interdisciplinary topic drawing on materials science, chemistry, physics, and geology Contains problems and answers to enhance knowledge retention Table of ContentsPreface xi 1 The ABX3 Perovskite Structure 1 1.1 Perovskites 1 1.2 The Cubic Perovskite Structure: SrTiO3 4 1.3 The Goldschmidt Tolerance Factor 6 1.4 ABX3 Perovskite Structure Variants 11 1.5 Cation Displacement: BaTiO3 as an Example 12 1.6 Jahn–Teller Octahedral Distortion: KCuF3 as an Example 16 1.7 Octahedral Tilting 19 1.7.1 Tilt Descriptions 19 1.7.2 Trigonal Symmetry: LaAlO3 as an Example 24 1.7.3 Orthorhombic Symmetry: GdFeO3 and CaTiO3 as Examples 26 1.8 Symmetry Relationships 30 1.9 Hybrid Organic–Inorganic Perovskites 33 1.10 Antiperovskites 34 1.10.1 Cubic and Related Structures 34 1.10.2 Other Structures 36 1.11 Structure‐Field Maps 36 1.12 Theoretical Calculations 38 References 40 Further Reading 40 2 ABX3–Related Structures 42 2.1 Double Perovskites and Related Ordered Structures 42 2.1.1 Rock‐Salt Ordered Double Perovskites 42 2.1.2 Other Ordered Perovskites 45 2.1.3 AA′3B4O12‐Related Phases 48 2.2 Anion Substituted Perovskites 51 2.2.1 Nitrides and Oxynitrides 51 2.2.2 Oxyfluorides 53 2.3 A‐Site‐Deficient Perovskite Structures 54 2.3.1 ReO3, WO3 and Related Structures 54 2.3.2 Perovskite Tungsten Bronzes 55 2.3.3 A‐Site‐Deficient Titanates, Niobates and Tantalates 55 2.4 Anion‐Deficient Phases Containing Tetrahedra 57 2.4.1 Brownmillerites 57 2.4.2 Brownmillerite Microstructures 62 2.4.3 Temperature Variation and Disorder 63 2.4.4 B‐Site Doped Brownmillerite Phases 64 2.4.5 B‐Site Doping and Oxygen Pressure 65 2.4.6 A‐Site Doped Brownmillerite Phases 65 2.4.7 Brownmillerite‐Related Phases 66 2.5 Anion‐Deficient Phases Containing Square Pyramids 69 2.5.1 Manganites 69 2.5.2 SrFeO2.5 and Related Phases 71 2.5.3 Cobaltite‐Related Phases 73 2.6 Point Defects, Microdomains and Modulated Phases 74 Further Reading 78 3 Hexagonal Perovskite–Related Structures 79 3.1 The BaNiO3 Structure 79 3.2 BaNiO3‐Related Phases Containing Trigonal Prisms 81 3.2.1 Commensurate Structures 81 3.2.2 Modulated Structures 89 3.3 Perovskites with Mixed Hexagonal/Cubic Packing: Nomenclature 92 3.4 Perovskites with Mixed Hexagonal/Cubic Packing: Stacking Sequences 95 3.5 Hexagonal Perovskites with chq and cph Stacking 98 3.5.1 (chq) Structures 98 3.5.2 (cph) Structures 99 3.5.3 cphq Intergrowth Structures 104 3.6 Hexagonal Perovskites with cphh Stacking 106 3.6.1 (cc…chh) AnBnO3n Structures 107 3.6.2 (cc…chh) AnBn−1O3n Structures 108 3.6.3 (hhcc…chhcc…c) Intergrowth Phases 110 3.6.4 (cc…ch) AnBn−1O3n Shift and Twinned Phases 112 3.7 Anion‐Deficient Phases Containing BaO2 (c′) Layers 112 3.7.1 (c…c′…ch) Structures 113 3.7.2 (c…c′…chh) Structures 113 3.7.3 (c…c′…chhh) Structures 115 3.8 Anion‐Deficient Phases with BaOX Layers 117 3.8.1 (h′) Layers 117 3.8.2 (c′c′) Layers 119 3.9 Sr4Mn3O10 and Ba6Mn5O16 120 3.10 Temperature and Pressure Variation 120 Reference 122 Further Reading 122 4 Modular Structures 123 4.1 K2NiF4 (A2BX4) and Ruddlesden–Popper Phases 123 4.1.1 The K2NiF4 (T or T/O) Structure 123 4.1.2 Ruddlesden–Popper Phases 127 4.2 The Nd2CuO4 (T′) and T* Structures 129 4.3 Dion–Jacobson and Related Phases 131 4.4 Aurivillius Phases 134 4.5 The Ca2Nb2O7‐Related Phases 136 4.6 Cuprate Superconductors and Related Phases 138 4.6.1 La2CuO4, Nd2CuO4 and YBa2Cu3O7 139 4.6.2 Layered Perovskite Structures 141 4.6.3 Structures Related to the Layered Cuprate Phases 142 4.7 Composition Variation 146 4.8 Intercalation and Exfoliation 151 Further Reading 154 5 Diffusion and Ionic Conductivity 156 5.1 Diffusion 156 5.2 Ionic Conductivity 159 5.3 Proton Conductivity 162 5.4 Oxygen Pressure Dependence and Electronic Conductivity 165 5.5 Oxide Ion Mixed Conductors 167 5.6 Proton Mixed Conductors 169 5.7 Solid Oxide Fuel Cells 172 References 174 Further Reading 174 6 Dielectric Properties 176 6.1 Insulating Perovskites 176 6.2 Dielectric Perovskites 178 6.2.1 General Properties 178 6.2.2 Colossal Dielectric Constant Materials 181 6.3 Ferroelectric/Piezoelectric Perovskites 182 6.3.1 Spontaneous Polarisation and Domains 182 6.3.2 Ferroelectric Domain Switching 185 6.3.3 Ferroelectric Hysteresis Loops 188 6.3.4 Temperature Dependence of Ferroelectricity 189 6.3.5 Pyroelectrics, Piezoelectrics and Crystal Symmetry 191 6.3.6 Strain versus Electric Field Loops 192 6.4 The Development of Ferroelectric/Piezoelectric Ceramic Bodies 193 6.4.1 Ceramic Piezoelectrics 193 6.4.2 Electrostriction 195 6.5 Antiferroelectrics 196 6.6 Ferrielectrics 199 6.7 Relaxor Ferroelectrics 200 6.7.1 Macroscopic Characteristics of Relaxor Ferroelectrics 200 6.7.2 Microstructures of Relaxor Ferroelectrics 202 6.8 Improper Ferroelectricity 206 6.9 Doping and Modification of Properties 208 6.10 Nanoparticles and Thin Films 212 References 215 Further Reading 215 7 Magnetic Properties 217 7.1 Magnetism in Perovskites 217 7.2 Paramagnetic Perovskites 219 7.3 Antiferromagnetic Perovskites 222 7.3.1 Cubic Perovskite‐Related Structures 222 7.3.2 Hexagonal Perovskites 229 7.4 Ferromagnetic Perovskites 233 7.5 Ferrimagnetic Perovskites 236 7.6 Spin Glass Behaviour 237 7.7 Canted Spins and Other Magnetic Ordering 238 7.8 Thin Films 240 7.9 Nanoparticles 243 7.10 Multiferroic Perovskites 243 References 246 Further Reading 246 8 Electronic Conductivity 247 8.1 Perovskite Band Structure: Metallic Perovskites 247 8.2 Metal–Insulator Transitions 250 8.2.1 Titanates and Related Phases 250 8.2.2 LnNiO3 252 8.2.3 Lanthanoid Manganites 253 8.2.4 Lanthanoid Cobaltites 254 8.2.5 (Sr, Ca)2RuO4 and Ca2Ru1−xCrxO4 255 8.2.6 NaOsO3 256 8.3 Perovskite Superconductors 257 8.4 Cuprate High‐Temperature Superconductors 258 8.4.1 Overview 258 8.4.2 Lanthanum Cuprate, La2CuO4 259 8.4.3 Neodymium Cuprate, Nd2CuO4 260 8.4.4 Yttrium Barium Copper Oxide, YBa2Cu3O7 261 8.4.5 Perovskite‐Related Structures and Series 263 8.4.6 The Generic Superconductivity Phase Diagram 263 8.4.7 Defects and Conductivity 265 8.5 Spin Polarisation and Half‐Metals 267 8.6 Charge Ordering and Orbital Ordering 268 8.7 Magnetoresistance 270 8.7.1 Collosal Magnetoresistance (CMR) in Manganites 270 8.7.2 Low‐Field Magnetoresistance 272 8.8 Semiconductivity in Perovskites 272 8.9 Thin Films and Surface Conductivity 275 References 275 Further Reading 275 9 Thermal and Optical Properties 277 9.1 Thermal Expansion 277 9.1.1 Normal Thermal Expansion 277 9.1.2 Thermal Contraction 280 9.1.3 Zero Thermal Expansion Materials 283 9.2 Thermoelectric Properties 284 9.3 The Magnetocaloric Effect 287 9.4 The Pyroelectric and Electrocaloric Effect 288 9.5 Transparency 289 9.6 Electrochromic Films 291 9.7 Electro‐optic Properties 293 9.7.1 Refractive Index Changes 293 9.7.2 Electro‐optic Phase Modulators 294 9.7.3 Electro‐optic Intensity Modulators 296 9.7.4 Ceramic Modulators 299 9.8 Perovskite Solar Cells 299 Reference 302 Further Reading 302 Appendix A The Bond Valence Model for Perovskites 303 Appendix B Summary of the Kröger–Vink Defect Notation 307 Index 309

    £113.36

  • Bionanocomposites

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Bionanocomposites

    5 in stock

    Book SynopsisBeginning with a general overview of nanocomposites, Bionanocomposites: Integrating Biological Processes for Bio-inspired Nanotechnologies details the systems available in nature (nucleic acids, proteins, carbohydrates, lipids) that can be integrated within suitable inorganic matrices for specific applications. Describing the relationship between architecture, hierarchy and function, this book aims at pointing out how bio-systems can be key components of nanocomposites. The text then reviews the design principles, structures, functions and applications of bionanocomposites. It also includes a section presenting related technical methods to helpreaders identify and understand the most widely used analytical tools such as mass spectrometry, calorimetry, and impedance spectroscopy, among others.Table of ContentsList of Contributors xv 1 What Are Bionanocomposites? 1Agathe Urvoas, Marie Valerio‐Lepiniec, Philippe Minard and Cordt Zollfrank 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 A Molecular Perspective: Why Biological Macromolecules? 3 1.3 Challenges for Bionanocomposites 3 References 6 2 Molecular Architecture of Living Matter 9 2.1 Nucleic Acids 11Enora Prado, Mónika Ádok‐Sipiczki and Corinne Nardin 2.1.1 Introduction: A Bit of History 11 2.1.2 Definition and Structure 12 2.1.2.1 Nomenclature 12 2.1.2.2 Structure 13 2.1.3 DNA and RNA Functions 15 2.1.3.1 Introduction 15 2.1.3.2 Transcription–Translation Process 16 2.1.3.3 Replication Process 18 2.1.4 Specific Secondary Structures 19 2.1.4.1 Watson–Crick H‐Bonds 19 2.1.4.1.1 Stem‐Loop 19 2.1.4.1.2 Kissing Complex 20 2.1.4.2 Other Kinds of H‐Bonding 21 2.1.4.2.1 G‐Quartets 21 2.1.4.2.2 i‐Motifs 23 2.1.5 Stability 23 2.1.6 Conclusion 25 References 25 2.2 Lipids 29Carole Aimé and Thibaud Coradin 2.2.1 Lipids Self‐Assembly 29 2.2.2 Structural Diversity of Lipids 30 2.2.2.1 Fatty Acyls (FA) 30 2.2.2.2 Glycerolipids (GL) 32 2.2.2.3 Glycerophospholipids (GP) 32 2.2.2.4 Sphingolipids (SP) 33 2.2.2.5 Sterol Lipids (ST) 34 2.2.2.6 Prenol Lipids (PR) 34 2.2.2.7 Saccharolipids (SL) 35 2.2.2.8 Polyketides (PK) 35 2.2.3 Lipid Synthesis and Distribution 35 2.2.4 The Diversity of Lipid Functions 36 2.2.4.1 Cellular Architecture 37 2.2.4.2 Lipid Rafts 37 2.2.4.3 Energy Storage 37 2.2.4.4 Regulating Membrane Proteins by Protein–Lipid Interactions 39 2.2.4.5 Signaling Functions 39 2.2.5 Lipidomics 39 References 40 2.3 Carbohydrates 41Mirjam Czjzek 2.3.1 Introduction 41 2.3.2 Monosaccharides 42 2.3.3 Oligosaccharides 44 2.3.3.1 Disaccharides 44 2.3.3.2 Protein Glycosylations 46 2.3.4 Polysaccharides 47 2.3.4.1 Cellulose 49 2.3.4.2 Hemicelluloses 50 2.3.4.2.1 Xyloglucan 50 2.3.4.2.2 Xylan 50 2.3.4.2.3 Mannan or Glucomannan 52 2.3.4.2.4 Mixed‐Linkage Glucan (MLG) 52 2.3.4.3 Pectins 53 2.3.4.4 Chitin 54 2.3.4.5 Alginate 54 2.3.4.6 Marine Galactans 55 2.3.4.7 Storage Polysaccharides: Starch, Glycogen, and Laminarin 55 References 56 2.4 Proteins: From Chemical Properties to Cellular Function: A Practical Review of Actin Dynamics 59Stéphane Romero and François‐Xavier Campbell‐Valois 2.4.1 Introduction 59 2.4.2 Molecular Architecture of Proteins 59 2.4.2.1 Amino Acids 60 2.4.2.2 Peptide Bond 60 2.4.2.3 Primary Structure 64 2.4.3 Protein Folding 66 2.4.3.1 Peptide and Protein: Secondary Structure 66 2.4.3.2 3D Folding: Tertiary Structure 67 2.4.3.3 Quaternary Structure 68 2.4.3.4 Protein Folding and De Novo Design 70 2.4.4 Interacting Proteins for Cellular Functions 73 2.4.4.1 Protein Interactions 73 2.4.4.2 Enzymatic Activity of Proteins 75 2.4.4.3 Molecular Motors 77 2.4.5 Self‐ Assembly and Auto‐Organization: Regulation of the Actin Cytoskeleton Assembly 78 2.4.5.1 Origin of the Actin Treadmilling 79 2.4.5.2 Regulation of Actin Treadmilling 83 2.4.5.3 Arp2/3 and Formin‐Initiated Actin Assembly to Generate Mechanical Forces 83 2.4.5.4 Self‐Organization Properties and Force Generation Understood Using In Vitro Reconstituted Actin‐Based Nanomovements 85 2.4.5.5 Applications in Bionanotechnologies 85 2.4.6 Conclusion 87 References 88 3 Functional Biomolecular Engineering 93 3.1 Nucleic Acid Engineering 95Enora Prado, Mónika Ádok‐Sipiczki and Corinne Nardin 3.1.1 Introduction 95 3.1.2 How to Synthetically Produce Nucleic Acids? 95 3.1.2.1 The Chemical Approach 95 3.1.2.2 Polymerase Chain Reaction 96 3.1.2.3 Combinatorial Synthesis of Oligonucleotides and Gene Libraries: Aptamers 100 3.1.3 Secondary Structures in Nanotechnologies 102 3.1.3.1 Watson–Crick H‐Bonds 102 3.1.3.1.1 Stem‐Loop 102 3.1.3.1.2 Kissing Complex 103 3.1.3.2 Other Kind of H‐Bonding 103 3.1.3.2.1 G‐Quartets 103 3.1.3.2.2 Origami: Nano‐architecture on Surface 105 3.1.4 Conclusion 108 References 108 3.2 Protein Engineering 113Agathe Urvoas, Marie Valerio‐Lepiniec and Philippe Minard 3.2.1 Synthesis of Polypeptides: Chemical or Biological Approach? 113 3.2.2 Proteins: From Natural to Artificial Sources 114 3.2.2.1 How to Get the Coding Sequence of the Protein of Interest? 114 3.2.2.2 E. coli: A Cheap “Protein Factory” with a Diversified Tool Box 114 3.2.2.3 Common Expression Plasmids 116 3.2.2.4 Limits of Recombinant Protein Expression in E. coli 117 3.2.2.5 Some Solutions Are Available to Solve these Expression Problems 118 3.2.3 Proteins: A Large Repertoire of Functional Objects 118 3.2.3.1 Looking for Natural Proteins with Desired Function 118 3.2.3.2 From Protein Engineering to Protein Design 119 3.2.3.2.1 Modified Proteins Are Often Destabilized 119 3.2.3.2.2 Natural or Engineered Proteins: From Small Step to Giant Leap in Sequence Space 120 3.2.3.2.3 Computational Protein Design 120 3.2.3.2.4 Directed Evolution: A Diverse Repertoire Combined with a Selection Process 121 3.2.3.3 Combining Chemistry with Biological Objects 123 3.2.3.3.1 Labeling Natural Amino Acids 123 3.2.3.3.2 Bioorthogonal Labeling 123 3.2.3.3.3 Tag‐Mediated Labeling and Enzymatic Coupling 125 3.2.3.3.4 Enzyme‐Mediated Ligation 126 3.2.3.3.5 Quality Control of Labeled Biomolecules 126 References 126 4 The Composite Approach 129 4.1 Inorganic Nanoparticles 131Carole Aimé and Thibaud Coradin 4.1.1 Introduction 131 4.1.2 Overview of Inorganic Nanoparticles 132 4.1.3 Synthesis of Inorganic Nanoparticles 132 4.1.3.1 Basic Principles 132 4.1.3.2 Nanoparticles from Solutions 138 4.1.3.2.1 Ionic Solids 138 4.1.3.2.2 Metals 139 4.1.3.2.3 Metal Oxides 140 4.1.3.2.4 Morphological Control 144 4.1.4 Some Specific Properties of Inorganic Nanoparticles 145 4.1.5 Concluding Remarks 149 References 149 4.2 Hybrid Particles: Conjugation of Biomolecules to Nanomaterials 153Nikola Ž. Knežević, Laurence Raehm and Jean‐Olivier Durand 4.2.1 General Considerations 153 4.2.2 Functionalization of Nanoparticle Surface 154 4.2.2.1 Functionalization of Hydroxylated Surfaces 154 4.2.2.2 Functionalization of Hydride‐Containing Surfaces 154 4.2.2.3 Functionalization of Metal‐Containing Nanoparticles 155 4.2.2.4 Functionalization of Carbon‐Based Nanomaterials 155 4.2.3 Linker‐Mediated Conjugation of Biomolecules to Nanoparticles 155 4.2.3.1 Conjugation through Carbodiimide Chemistry 155 4.2.3.2 Carbamate, Urea, and Thiourea Linkage 156 4.2.3.3 Schiff Base Linkage 158 4.2.3.4 Multicomponent Linkage Formation 159 4.2.3.5 Biofunctionalization through Alkylation 160 4.2.3.6 Bioorthogonal Linkage Formation 161 4.2.3.7 Conjugation through Host–Guest Interactions 162 4.2.3.8 Linkage through Metal Coordination 162 4.2.3.9 Ligation through Complementary Base Pairing 164 4.2.3.10 Electrostatic Interactions 164 4.2.4 Conclusions 164 Acknowledgments 165 References 165 4.3 Biocomposites from Nanoparticles: From 1D to 3D Assemblies 169Carole Aimé and Thibaud Coradin 4.3.1 General Considerations 169 4.3.2 One‐Dimensional Bionanocomposites 170 4.3.3 Two‐Dimensional Organization of Nanoparticles 175 4.3.4 Three‐Dimensional Organization of Particles 175 4.3.5 Conclusion and Perspectives 180 References 180 5 Applications 185 5.1 Optical Properties 187Cordt Zollfrank and Daniel Van Opdenbosch 5.1.1 Introduction 187 5.1.2 Interactions of Light with Matter 189 5.1.3 Optics at the Nanoscale 190 5.1.3.1 Nanoscale Optical Processes 190 5.1.3.2 Nanoscale Confinement of Matter 191 5.1.3.3 Nanoscale Confinement of Radiations 191 5.1.4 Optical Properties of Bionanocomposites 191 5.1.4.1 Absorption Properties of Bionanocomposites 192 5.1.4.2 Emission Properties of Bionanocomposites 195 5.1.4.3 Structural Colors with Bionanocomposites 200 5.1.5 Conclusions 201 References 202 5.2 Magnetic Bionanocomposites: Current Trends, Scopes, and Applications 205Wei Li, Yuehan Wu, Xiaogang Luo and Shilin Liu 5.2.1 Introduction 205 5.2.2 Construction Strategies for Magnetic Biocomposites 208 5.2.2.1 The Blending Method 208 5.2.2.2 In Situ Synthesis Method 209 5.2.2.3 Grafting‐onto Method 210 5.2.3 Applications of Magnetic Biocomposites 212 5.2.3.1 Environmental Applications 212 5.2.3.1.1 Removal of Toxic Metal Ions 212 5.2.3.1.2 Removal of Dyes 216 5.2.3.1.3 Biocatalysis and Bioremediation 216 5.2.3.2 Biomedical Applications 218 5.2.3.2.1 Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI) 218 5.2.3.2.2 Cellular Therapy and Labeling 219 5.2.3.2.3 Tissue Engineering Applications 221 5.2.3.2.4 Drug Delivery 221 5.2.3.2.5 Tissue Regeneration 224 5.2.3.3 Biotechnological and Bioengineering Applications 225 5.2.3.3.1 Biosensing 226 5.2.3.3.2 Magnetically Responsive Films 228 5.2.4 Concluding Remarks and Future Trends 228 Acknowledgments 229 References 229 5.3 Mechanical Properties of Natural Biopolymer Nanocomposites 235Biqiong Chen 5.3.1 Introduction 235 5.3.2 Overview of Mechanical Properties of Polymer Nanocomposites and Their Measurement Methods 237 5.3.3 Solid Biopolymer Nanocomposites 237 5.3.4 Porous Biopolymer Nanocomposites 245 5.3.5 Biopolymer Nanocomposite Hydrogels 247 5.3.6 Conclusions 249 References 251 5.4 Bionanocomposite Materials for Biocatalytic Applications 257Sarah Christoph and Francisco M. Fernandes 5.4.1 Bionanocomposites and Biocatalysis 257 5.4.2 Form and Function in Bionanocomposite Materials for Biocatalysis 260 5.4.2.1 Bionanocomposites Structure 260 5.4.2.1.1 Biopolymers 260 5.4.2.1.2 The Inorganic Fraction 264 5.4.2.2 Key Biocatalysts 269 5.4.2.2.1 Nucleotides and Amino Acids 269 5.4.2.2.2 Enzymes 272 5.4.2.2.3 Whole Cells 273 5.4.3 Applications 277 5.4.3.1 Biosynthesis 277 5.4.3.2 Sensing Applications 281 5.4.3.3 Environmental Applications 283 5.4.3.4 Energy Applications of Biocatalytic Bionanocomposites 286 5.4.4 Conclusions and Perspectives 289 References 290 5.5 Nanocomposite Biomaterials 299Gisela Solange Alvarez and Martín Federico Desimone 5.5.1 Introduction 299 5.5.2 Natural Nanocomposites 301 5.5.2.1 Cellulosic Materials 301 5.5.2.2 Chitosan 305 5.5.2.3 Alginate 305 5.5.2.4 Collagen 307 5.5.2.5 Gelatin 307 5.5.2.6 Silk Fibroin 309 5.5.3 Synthetic Nanocomposites 309 5.5.3.1 PLLA and PLGA 309 5.5.3.2 Polyethylene Glycol 312 5.5.3.3 Methacrylate 312 5.5.3.4 Polyvinyl Alcohol 314 5.5.3.5 Polyurethanes 314 5.5.4 Conclusions 315 Acknowledgments 317 References 317 6 A Combination of Characterization Techniques 321Carole Aimé and Thibaud Coradin 6.1 Introductory Remarks 321 6.2 Chemical Analyses 322 6.2.1 Inductively Coupled Plasma 322 6.2.2 Infrared Spectroscopy 323 6.2.3 X‐Ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy and Auger Electron Spectroscopy 324 6.2.4 Energy–Dispersive X‐Ray Spectroscopy and Electron–Energy Loss Spectroscopy 328 6.3 Determining Size and Structure 329 6.3.1 Imaging 329 6.3.1.1 Electron Microscopy 330 6.3.1.2 Atomic Force Microscopy 333 6.3.2 Scattering Techniques 335 6.3.2.1 Small Angle Scattering 337 6.3.2.2 Dynamic Light Scattering and Zetametry 337 6.3.3 Monitoring Particle–Biomolecule Interactions 339 6.3.3.1 Electrophoresis 339 6.3.3.2 Circular Dichroism Spectroscopy 340 6.3.3.3 Isothermal Titration Calorimetry and Surface Plasmon Resonance 342 6.4 Materials Properties 344 6.4.1 Optical Properties 344 6.4.2 Mechanical Testing 346 6.4.2.1 Rheology 346 6.4.2.2 Compression Tests 347 6.4.2.3 Tensile Tests 348 6.4.2.4 Relaxation Tests 348 6.4.2.5 Dynamic Mechanical Analysis 349 6.4.2.6 Indentation 349 6.4.2.7 Mechanical Testing of Hydrogels 349 6.4.3 Magnetic Measurements 350 6.4.4 Biological Properties 353 References 355 Index 359

    5 in stock

    £136.76

  • Polymer Nanotubes Nanocomposites

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Polymer Nanotubes Nanocomposites

    3 in stock

    Book SynopsisSince the publication of the successful first edition of the book in 2010, the field has matured and a large number of advancements have been made to the science of polymer nanotube nanocomposites (PNT) in terms of synthesis, filler surface modification, as well as properties. Moreover, a number of commercial applications have been realized. The aim of this second volume of the book is, thus, to update the information presented in the first volume as well as to incorporate the recent research and industrial developments. This edited volume brings together contributions from a variety of senior scientists in the field of polymer nanotube composites technology to shed light on the recent advances in these commercially important areas of polymer technology. The book provides the following features: Reviews the various synthesis techniques, properties and applications of the polymer nanocomposite systems. Describes the functionalization strategies for singleTable of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Polymer Nanotube Nanocomposites: A Review of Synthesis Methods, Properties and Applications 1 Joel Fawaz and Vikas Mittal 1.1 Introduction 2 1.2 Methods of Nanotube Nanocomposites Synthesis 4 1.3 Properties of Polymer Nanotube Nanocomposites 18 1.4 Applications 38 References 40 2 Functionalization Strategies for Single-Walled Carbon Nanotubes Integration into Epoxy Matrices 45 J.M. González-Domínguez, A.M. Díez-Pascual, A. Ansón-Casaos, M.A. Gómez-Fatou, and M. T. Martínez 2.1 Introduction 46 2.2 Covalent Strategies for the Production of SWCNT 51 2.3 Non-covalent Strategies for the Production of SWCNT/Epoxy Composites 62 2.4 Effect of Functionalization on the Epoxy Physical Properties 76 2.5 Applications of Functionalized SWCNTs in Epoxy Composites 104 2.6 Concluding Remarks and Future Outlook 106 Acknowledgements 108 References 109 3 Multiscale Modeling of Polymer?Nanotube Nanocomposites 117 Maenghyo Cho and Seunghwa Yang 3.1 Introduction 117 3.2 Molecular Modeling and Simulation of CNT-Polymer Nanocomposites 121 3.3 Micromechanics Modeling and Simulation of CNT-Polymer Nanocomposites 132 3.4 Fully Integrated Multiscale Model for Elastoplastic Behavior with Imperfect Interface 145 3.5 Conclusion and Perspective on Future Trends 158 References 160 4 SEM and TEM Characterization of Polymer Nanotube Nanocomposites 167 Francisco Solá 4.1 Introduction 167 4.2 Imaging CNTs in Polymer Matrices by SEM 168 4.3 Mechanical Properties of CNT/Polymer Nanocomposites by In-Situ SEM 172 4.4 Imaging CNT in Polymer Matrices by TEM 176 4.5 Mechanical Properties of CNT/Polymer Nanocomposites by In-Situ TEM 180 4.6 Conclusions and Future Outlook 181 Acknowledgement 182 References 183 5 Polymer-Nanotube Nanocomposites for Transfemoral Sockets 187 S. Arun and S. Kanagaraj 5.1 Introduction 188 5.2 Materials Used for the Socket System 190 5.3 Summary 204 Acknowledgements 204 References 204 6 Micro-Patterning of Polymer Nanotube Nanocomposites 211 Naga S. Korivi 6.1 Introduction 211 6.2 Micro-Patterning Methods 213 6.3 Conclusions 230 Acknowledgments 231 References 231 7 Carbon Nanotube-Based Hybrid Materials and Their Polymer Composites 239 Tianxi Liu, Wei Fan, and Chao Zhang 7.1 Introduction 240 7.2 Structures and Properties of Carbon Nanomaterials 242 7.3 Strategies for the Hybridization of CNTs with Carbon Nanomaterials 247 7.4 Preparation of CNT-Based Hybrid Reinforced Polymer Nanocomposites 257 7.5 Physical Properties of CNT-Based Hybrid Reinforced Polymer Nanocomposites 262 7.6 Summary 272 Acknowledgements 273 References 273 8 Polymer-Carbon Nanotube Nanocomposite Foams 279 Marcelo Antunes and José Ignacio Velasco 8.1 Introduction 279 8.2 Basic Concepts of Polymer Nanocomposite Foams 281 8.3 Main Polymer Nanocomposite Foaming Technologies 282 8.4 Polymer-Carbon Nanotube Nanocomposite Foams 287 8.5 Recent Developments and New Applications of Polymer- Carbon Nanotube Nanocomposite Foams 312 8.6 Conclusions 320 Acknowledgements 322 References 323 9 Processing and Properties of Carbon Nanotube/Polycarbonate Composites 333 Shailaja Pande, Bhanu Pratap Singh, and Rakesh Behari Mathur 9.1 Introduction 333 9.2 Fabrication/ Processing of CNT/PC Composites 335 9.3 Mechanical Properties of CNT/PC Composites 344 9.4 Electrical Properties of CNT/PC Composites 355 9.5 Conclusions 359 References 361 10 Advanced Microscopy Techniques for a Better Understanding of the Polymer/Nanotube Composite Properties 365 K. Masenelli-Varlot, C. Gauthier, L. Chazeau, F. Dalmas, T. Epicier, and J.Y. Cavaillé 10.1 Introduction 365 10.2 Near-Field Microscopies 367 10.3 Transmission Electron Microscopy 372 10.4 Scanning Electron Microscopy 387 10.5 Focused Ion Beam Microscopy 395 10.6 Conclusions 396 Acknowledgements 398 References 398 11 Visualization of CNTs in Polymer Composites 405 Wenjing Li and Wolfgang Bauhofer 11.1 Introduction 405 11.2 Experimental 408 11.3 Visualization of CNTs at High Accelerating Voltage (5-15 kV) 408 11.4 Visualization of CNTs at Low Accelerating Voltage (0.3-5 kV) 417 11.5 Essential Requirements and Tips for CNT Visualization 423 11.6 Conclusion 424 Acknowledgement 425 References (with DOI) 425 Reference List 426 12 Polymer Nanotube Composites: Latest Challenges and Applications 429 Amal M. K. Esawi and Mahmoud M. Farag 12.1 Carbon Nanotubes 430 12.2 Case Studies 440 12.3 Conclusions 459 References 460 Index

    3 in stock

    £157.45

  • Dynamics of the Rigid Solid with General

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Dynamics of the Rigid Solid with General

    10 in stock

    Book SynopsisCovers both holonomic and non-holonomic constraints in a study of the mechanics of the constrained rigid body.Table of ContentsPreface xi 1 Elements of Mathematical Calculation 1 1.1 Vectors: Vector Operations 1 1.2 Real Rectangular Matrix 4 1.3 Square Matrix 6 1.4 Skew Matrix of Third Order 10 Further Reading 12 2 Kinematics of the Rigid Solid 15 2.1 Finite Displacements of the Points of Rigid Solid 15 2.2 Matrix of Rotation: Properties 16 2.2.1 General Properties 16 2.2.2 Successive Displacements 17 2.2.3 Eigenvalues: Eigenvectors 18 2.2.4 The Expression of the Matrix of Rotation with the Aid of the Unitary Eigenvector and the Angle of Rotation 20 2.2.5 Symmetries: Decomposition of the Rotation into Two Symmetries 24 2.2.6 Rotations About the Axes of Coordinates 25 2.3 Minimum Displacements: The Chasles Theorem 27 2.4 Small Displacements 33 2.5 Velocities of the Points of Rigid Solid 34 2.6 The Angular Velocity Matrix: Properties 37 2.6.1 The Matrices of Rotation About the Axes of Coordinates 37 2.6.2 The Angular Velocity Matrix: The Angular Velocity Vector 38 2.6.3 The Matrix of the Partial Derivatives of the Angular Velocity 39 2.7 Composition of the Angular Velocities 41 2.8 Accelerations of the Points of Rigid Solid 42 Further Reading 43 3 General Theorems in the Dynamics of the Rigid Solid 45 3.1 Moments of Inertia 45 3.1.1 Definitions: Relations Between the Moments of Inertia 45 3.1.2 Moments of Inertia for Homogeneous Rigid Solid Bodies 47 3.1.3 Centers of Weight 47 3.1.4 Variation of the Moments of Inertia Relative to Parallel Axes 49 3.1.5 Variation of the Moments of Inertia Relative to Concurrent Axes 50 3.1.6 Principal Axes of Inertia: Principal Moments of Inertia 52 3.2 Momentum: The Theorem of Momentum 54 3.3 Moment of Momentum: The Theorem of Moment of Momentum 56 3.4 The Kinetic Energy of the Rigid Solid 57 Further Reading 58 4 Matrix Differential Equations of the Motion of Rigid Solid 61 4.1 The Differential Equations Obtained from the General Theorems 61 4.1.1 General Aspects 61 4.1.2 The Differential Equations 62 4.2 The Lagrange Equations in the Case of the Holonomic Constraints 63 4.3 The Equivalence between the Differential Equations Obtained from the General Theorems and the Lagrange Equations 65 4.3.1 The Equivalence for the First Component 65 4.3.2 The Equivalence for the Second Component 66 4.4 The Matrix Differential Equations for the Motion of the Constrained Rigid Solid 71 4.4.1 The Matrix of Constraints 71 4.4.2 The Lagrange Equations for Mechanical Systems with Constraints 73 4.4.3 The Mathematical Model of the Motion of Rigid Solid with Constraints 75 4.4.4 General Algorithm of Calculation 76 4.4.5 The Calculation of the Forces of Constraints 78 4.4.6 The Elimination of the Matrix of the Lagrange multipliers 80 Further Reading 85 5 Generalized Forces: The Equilibrium of the Rigid Solid 89 5.1 The Generalized Forces in the Case of a Mechanical System 89 5.2 The General Expressions of the Generalized Forces in the Case of Rigid Solid 90 5.2.1 The Case When at a Point Acts a Given Force 90 5.2.2 The Case When the Rigid Solid is Acted by a Torque of Given Moment 93 5.3 Conservative Forces 94 5.3.1 General Aspects 94 5.3.2 The Weight 96 5.3.3 The Elastic Force of a Spring 97 5.4 The Equilibrium of the Constrained Rigid Solid 98 5.4.1 The Equations of Equilibrium: Numerical Solution 98 5.4.2 The Case When the Functions of Constraints Introduce Auxiliary Coordinates (Pseudo-Coordinates) 100 5.5 The Equilibrium of the Heavy Rigid Solid Hanged by Springs 104 5.5.1 The Matrix Equation of Equilibrium 104 5.5.2 Numerical Solution 106 5.5.3 The Case When the Fixed Reference System Coincides to the Local Reference System at the Equilibrium Position 108 Further Reading 109 6 The Motion of the Rigid Solid with Constraints at Given Proper Points 113 6.1 General Aspects: Classification 113 6.2 Mathematical Aspects: Notations 114 6.2.1 The Case of the Motion Depending on Only the Generalized Coordinates XO, YO, ZO, ψ, θ, φ 114 6.2.2 The Case of the Constraints Depending on the Pseudo-Coordinates Too 115 6.2.3 Relations of Calculation Necessary for the Numerical Algorithm 115 6.3 The Study of the Rigid Solid with a Fixed Point 116 6.4 The Rigid Solid with Two Fixed Points (the Rotational Motion of the Rigid Solid) 118 6.5 The Rigid Solid with a Given Point Situated on a Fixed Surface 121 6.5.1 The Case When the Surface is Defined by an Implicit Equation F X,Y,Z = 0 121 6.5.2 The Case When the Surface is Defined by Parametric Equations 123 6.6 The Rigid Solid with Several Points Situated on Fixed Surfaces (Curves) 125 6.6.1 The Case When the Surfaces are Defined by Implicit Equations 125 6.6.2 The Case When the Surfaces are Defined by Parametric Equations 126 6.7 The Rigid Solid with a Fixed Point and with Another Point Situated on a Fixed Surface 127 6.7.1 The Case When the Fixed Surface is Defined by an Implicit Equation 127 6.7.2 The Case When the Fixed Surface is Defined by Parametric Equations 129 6.8 The Rigid Solid with Two Given Points Situated on a Fixed Curve 130 6.8.1 The Case When the Curve is Defined by Two Implicit Equations 130 6.8.2 The Case When the Curve is Defined by Parametric Equations 131 6.8.3 The Helical Motion of the Rigid Solid 132 Further Reading 133 7 The Motion of the Rigid Solid with Constraints on Given Proper Curves 135 7.1 General Aspects: Classification 135 7.2 The Rigid Solid Supported at Fixed Points on Given Proper Curves 136 7.2.1 Notations 136 7.2.2 The Matrix of Constraints 137 7.3 The Rigid Solid at Which Given Proper Curves Support with Sliding on Fixed Curves 138 7.3.1 Notations 138 7.3.2 The Simple Contact between the Curves 139 7.3.3 The Tangency Contact between Spatial Curves 143 7.3.4 Contact with Sliding between Planar Curves (Rolling with Sliding on the Plan) 144 7.4 Rolling without Sliding of a Curve on a Fixed Curve 147 7.4.1 The General Case for Spatial Curves 147 7.4.2 The Rolling Without Sliding of a Curve on a Fixed Curve in the Plan 148 7.5 The Motion of the Rigid Solid at Which the Curves Jointed to It Support with Sliding on Fixed Surfaces 151 7.5.1 The Case of a Single Curve 151 7.5.2 The Case of the Supporting with Sliding by Curves on Surface 154 7.6 The Rolling without Sliding of a Disk Bounded by a Spatial Curve on a Fixed Surface 157 7.6.1 The Matrix Differential Equation of Motion 157 7.6.2 The Forces at the Contact Point 159 7.7 The Rolling without Sliding of a Planar Circle Disk on a Horizontal Plan 160 7.8 The Rolling without Sliding of a Planar Elliptic Disk on a Horizontal Plan 168 7.9 The Rolling without Sliding of a Hyperboidic Curve on a Horizontal Plan 175 7.9.1 Hyperboidic Curves 175 7.9.2 The Matrix Differential Equation of Motion 176 7.10 The Rolling without Sliding of a Planar Circle Disk on a Cylindrical Surface with Horizontal Generatrices 184 7.11 The Rolling without Sliding of Two Curves of a Rigid Solid on a Fixed Surface 192 7.11.1 General Aspects 192 7.11.2 The Differential Equations of Motion 195 7.11.3 The Algorithm of Numerical Calculation 196 7.12 The Rolling without Sliding of an Axle with Wheels (Disks) with Angular Deviations on a Horizontal Plan 197 7.13 The Rolling without Sliding of an Axle with Disks on a Hyperbolic Paraboloid 204 7.13.1 General Aspects 204 7.13.2 The Initial Position 206 7.13.3 The Differential Equations 207 Further Reading 214 8 The Motion of the Rigid Solid with Constraints on the Bounding Surface 217 8.1 General Aspects: Classification 217 8.2 The Rigid Solid Supported at Fixed Points 218 8.2.1 The Matrix of Constraints 218 8.2.2 The Matrix Differential Equation of Motion 220 8.2.3 The Algorithm of Calculation 221 8.3 The Rigid Solid Supported with Sliding on Fixed Curves 236 8.3.1 The Matrix of Constraints 236 8.3.2 The Matrix Differential Equation of Motion 239 8.3.3 The Reactions 239 8.3.4 The Algorithm of Calculation 240 8.4 The Rolling without Sliding of the Rigid Solid on Two Fixed Curves 244 8.4.1 General Considerations 244 8.4.2 The Differential Equations of Motion 246 8.4.3 The Algorithm for the Numerical Calculation 248 8.5 The Rolling without Sliding of a Rigid Solid on a Fixed Surface 254 8.5.1 The Matrix of Constraints 254 8.5.2 The Matrix Differential Equation of Motion 256 8.6 The Rolling without Sliding of a Toroidal Wheel on a Horizontal Plan 257 8.6.1 The Equations of Torus 257 8.6.2 The Tangency Conditions 258 8.6.3 The Initial Conditions 258 8.6.4 The Differential Equations of Motion 260 8.7 The Rolling without Sliding of a Rigid Solid Supported on Two Fixed Surfaces 265 8.7.1 General Aspects 265 8.7.2 The Differential Equations of Motion 267 8.7.3 The Determination of the Forces of Constraints 269 8.7.4 The Rolling without Sliding of an Ellipsoid Acted only by its Own Weight on Two Plans 270 8.8 The Rolling without Sliding of a Rigid Solid Supported at Two Points on a Fixed Surface 291 8.8.1 General Aspects 291 8.8.2 The Differential Equations of Motion: The Calculation of the Forces of Constraints 293 Further Reading 294 Appendix 297 Index 315

    10 in stock

    £93.05

  • Automotive Power Transmission Systems

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Automotive Power Transmission Systems

    Book SynopsisProvides technical details and developments for all automotive power transmission systems The transmission system of an automotive vehicle is the key to the dynamic performance, drivability and comfort, and fuel economy. Modern advanced transmission systems are the combination of mechanical, electrical and electronic subsystems. The development of transmission products requires the synergy of multi-disciplinary expertise in mechanical engineering, electrical engineering, and electronic and software engineering. Automotive Power Transmission Systems comprehensively covers various types of power transmission systems of ground vehicles, including conventional automobiles driven by internal combustion engines, and electric and hybrid vehicles. The book covers the technical aspects of design, analysis and control for manual transmissions, automatic transmission, CVTs, dual clutch transmissions, electric drives, and hybrid power systems. It not only presents the technical details of key Table of ContentsSeries Preface xi Preface xiii 1 Automotive Engine Matching 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Output Characteristics of Internal Combustion Engines 2 1.2.1 Engine Output Power and Torque 2 1.2.2 Engine Fuel Map 4 1.2.3 Engine Emission Map 5 1.3 Road Load, Driving Force, and Acceleration 6 1.3.1 Axle Loads 7 1.3.2 Road Loads 8 1.3.3 Powertrain Kinematics and Traction 9 1.3.4 Driving Condition Diagram 13 1.3.5 Ideal Transmission 15 1.3.6 Power–Speed Chart 17 1.4 Selection of Gear Ratios 18 1.4.1 Highest Gear Ratio 18 1.4.2 First Gear Ratio 19 1.4.3 Intermediate Gear Ratios 20 1.4.4 Finalization of Gear Ratios 23 References 26 Problem 26 2 Manual Transmissions 29 2.1 Introduction 29 2.2 Powertrain Layout and Manual Transmission Structure 30 2.3 Power Flows and Gear Ratios 37 2.4 Manual Transmission Clutches 40 2.4.1 Clutch Structure 40 2.4.2 Clutch Torque Capacity 43 2.4.3 Clutch Design 44 2.5 Synchronizer and Synchronization 45 2.5.1 Shift without Synchronizer 45 2.5.2 Shift with Synchronizer 47 2.6 Dynamic Modeling of Synchronization Process 52 2.6.1 Equivalent Mass Moment of Inertia 53 2.6.2 Equation of Motion during Synchronization 55 2.6.3 Condition for Synchronization 56 2.7 Shifting Mechanisms 59 References 62 Problems 62 3 Transmission Gear Design 65 3.1 Introduction 65 3.2 Gear Design Fundamentals 66 3.2.1 Conjugate Motion and Definitions 66 3.2.2 Property of Involute Curves 67 3.2.3 Involute Curves as Gear Tooth Profiles 68 3.2.4 Characteristics of Involute Gearing 69 3.3 Design of Tooth Element Proportions of Standard Gears 72 3.3.1 Gear Dimensional and Geometrical Parameters 72 3.3.2 Standardization of Tooth Dimensions 72 3.3.3 Tooth Dimensions of Standard Gears 74 3.3.4 Contact Ratio 74 3.3.5 Tooth Thickness and Space along the Tooth Height 76 3.4 Design of Non-Standard Gears 78 3.4.1 Standard and Non-Standard Cutter Settings 78 3.4.2 Avoidance of Tooth Undercutting and Minimum Number of Teeth 79 3.4.3 Systems of Non-standard Gears 81 3.4.4 Design of Long-Short Addendum Gear System 82 3.4.5 Design of General Non-Standard Gear System 83 3.5 Involute Helical Gears 86 3.5.1 Characteristics of Involute Helical Gearing 87 3.5.2 Design Parameters on the Normal and Transverse Sections 87 3.5.3 Tooth Dimensions of Standard Involute Helical Gears 89 3.5.4 Minimum Number of Teeth for Involute Helical Gears 89 3.5.5 Contact Ratio of Involute Helical Gears 90 3.5.6 Design of Non-standard Involute Helical Gears 91 3.6 Gear Tooth Strength and Pitting Resistance 91 3.6.1 Determination of Gear Forces 91 3.6.2 AGMA Standard on Bending Strength and Pitting Resistance 93 3.6.3 Pitting Resistance 93 3.6.4 Bending Strength 94 3.7 Design of Automotive Transmission Gears 95 3.8 Planetary Gear Trains 103 3.8.1 Simple Planetary Gear Train 106 3.8.2 Dual-Planet Planetary Gear Train 107 3.8.3 Ravigneaux Planetary Gear Train 107 References 108 Problems 109 4 Torque Converters 111 4.1 Introduction 111 4.2 Torque Converter Structure and Functions 112 4.2.1 Torque Multiplication and Fluid Coupling 114 4.2.2 Torque Converter Locking up 115 4.3 ATF Circulation and Torque Formulation 116 4.3.1 Terminologies and Definitions 116 4.3.2 Velocity Diagrams 119 4.3.3 Angular Momentum of ATF Flow and Torque Formulation 122 4.4 Torque Capacity and Input–Output Characteristics 124 4.4.1 Torque Converter Capacity Factor 125 4.4.2 Input–Output Characteristics 127 4.4.3 Joint Operation of Torque Converter and Engine 128 4.4.4 Joint Operation of Torque Converter and Vehicle Powertrain 129 References 133 Problem 134 5 Automatic Transmissions: Design, Analysis, and Dynamics 137 5.1 Introduction 137 5.2 Structure of Automatic Transmissions 139 5.3 Ratio Analysis and Synthesis 153 5.3.1 Ford FWD Six-Speed AT 153 5.3.2 Ford six-speed RWD Ravigneaux AT 160 5.3.3 ZF RWD Eight-Speed AT 162 5.4 Transmission Dynamics 164 5.4.1 Ford FWD Six-Speed AT 165 5.4.2 Ford RWD Six-Speed AT 170 5.4.3 ZF RWD Eight-Speed AT 172 5.5 Qualitative Analysis on Transmission Shifting Dynamics 175 5.6 General Vehicle Powertrain Dynamics 186 5.6.1 General State Variable Equation in Matrix Form 187 5.6.2 Specific State Variable Equation 188 5.6.3 Solution of State Variables by Variable Substitution 192 5.6.4 Vehicle System Integration 193 5.7 Simulation of Vehicle Powertrain Dynamics 195 References 198 Problems 198 6 Automatic Transmissions: Control and Calibration 201 6.1 Introduction 201 6.2 Components and Hydraulic Circuits for Transmission Control 203 6.3 System Circuit Configurations for Transmission Control 216 6.3.1 System Hydraulic Circuitry for the Previous Generation of ATs 216 6.3.2 System Hydraulic Circuitry for ATs with Independent Clutch Pressure Control 218 6.3.3 System Hydraulic Circuitry for ATs with Direct Clutch Pressure Control 223 6.4 Transmission Control Strategy 225 6.4.1 Transmission shift schedule 225 6.4.2 Torque Converter Lock Control 228 6.4.3 Lock-Release Schedule 229 6.4.4 Lock-Release Operation 231 6.4.5 Engine Torque Control During Shifts 233 6.4.6 Shift Process Control 236 6.4.7 Initial Clutch Pressure Profiles 238 6.4.8 Initial Piston Stroke Attributes 239 6.4.9 Feedback Shift Control 239 6.4.10 Torque Based Shift Control 241 6.4.11 System Diagnosis and Failure Mode Management 245 6.5 Calibration of Transmission Control System 245 6.5.1 Component Level Calibration 246 6.5.2 System Level Calibration 247 References 249 Problem 250 7 Continuously Variable Transmissions 251 7.1 Introduction 251 7.2 CVT Layouts and Key Components 253 7.2.1 Belt Structure 254 7.2.2 Input and Output Pulleys 254 7.2.3 Basic Ratio Equation 255 7.3 Force Analysis for Belt CVT 257 7.3.1 Forces Acting on a Metal Block 257 7.3.2 Forces Acting on Pulley Sheaves 258 7.3.3 Block Compression and Ring Tension 262 7.3.4 Torque Transmitting Mechanism 263 7.3.5 Forces Acting on the Whole Belt 267 7.3.6 Relation between Thrusts on Input and Output Pulleys 268 7.3.7 Ratio Changing Mechanism 272 7.4 CVT Control System Design and Operation Control 273 7.4.1 VBS Based Control System 274 7.4.2 Servo Mechanism Control System 277 7.4.3 Comparison of the Two Control System Designs 285 7.5 CVT Control Strategy and Calibration 287 7.5.1 Line Pressure Control 287 7.5.2 Continuous Ratio Control Strategy 288 7.5.3 Stepped Ratio Control Strategy 292 7.5.4 CVT Control Calibration 293 References 295 Problems 296 8 Dual Clutch Transmissions 299 8.1 Introduction 299 8.2 DCT Layouts and Key Components 300 8.2.1 Dry Dual Clutch Transmissions 301 8.2.2 Wet Dual Clutch Transmissions 306 8.3 Modeling of DCT Vehicle Dynamics 307 8.3.1 Equations of Motion during Launch and Shifts 307 8.4 DCT Clutch Control 313 8.5 Clutch Torque Formulation 322 8.5.1 Correlation on Clutch Torque and Control Variable 322 8.5.2 Case Study on Clutch Torque and Control Variable Correlation 325 8.5.3 Algorithm for Clutch Torque Calculation under Real Time Conditions 327 8.5.4 Case Study for the Clutch Torque Algorithm 328 References 330 Problems 331 9 Electric Powertrains 333 9.1 Basics of Electric Vehicles 333 9.2 Current Status and Trends for EVs 333 9.3 Output Characteristic of Electric Machines 336 9.4 DC Machines 337 9.4.1 Principle of DC Machines 338 9.4.2 Excitation Types of DC Machines 342 9.4.3 Speed Control of DC Machines 343 9.5 Induction Machines 347 9.5.1 Principle of Induction Motors 348 9.5.2 Equivalent Circuit of Induction Motors 349 9.5.3 Speed Control of Induction Machine 352 9.5.4 Variable Frequency, Variable Voltage Control of Induction Motors 354 9.5.5 Efficiency and Losses of Induction Machine 355 9.5.6 Field-Oriented Control of Induction Machine 356 9.6 Permanent Magnet Motor Drives 361 9.6.1 Basic Configuration of PM Motors 361 9.6.2 Basic Principle and Operation of PM Motors 364 9.7 Switched Reluctance Motors 370 9.8 EV Transmissions 372 9.8.1 Single-Speed EV Transmission 372 9.8.2 Multiple Ratio EV Transmissions 374 9.9 Conclusions 379 Bibliography 380 10 Hybrid Powertrains 389 10.1 Series HEVs 390 10.2 Parallel HEVs 391 10.3 Series–Parallel HEVs 394 10.4 Complex HEVs 400 10.4.1 GM Two-Mode Hybrid Transmission 400 10.4.2 Dual Clutch Hybrid Transmissions 407 10.4.3 Hybrid Transmission Proposed by Zhang, et al. 413 10.4.4 Renault IVT Hybrid Transmission 415 10.4.5 Timken Two-Mode Hybrid Transmission 416 10.4.6 Tsai’s Hybrid Transmission 419 10.4.7 Hybrid Transmission with Both Speed and Torque Coupling Mechanism 421 10.4.8 Toyota Highlander and Lexus Hybrid, e-Four Wheel Drive 423 10.4.9 CAMRY Hybrid 424 10.4.10 Chevy Volt Powertrain 425 10.5 Non-Ideal Gears in the Planetary System 427 10.6 Dynamics of Planetary Gear Based Transmissions 427 10.7 Conclusions 428 References 429 Index 431

    £92.66

  • Rheology and Processing of Polymer Nanocomposites

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Rheology and Processing of Polymer Nanocomposites

    1 in stock

    Book SynopsisRheology and Processing of Polymer Nanocomposites examines the current state of the art and new challenges in the characterization of nanofiller/polymer interactions, nanofiller dispersion, distribution, filler-filler interactions and interfaces in polymer nanocomposites.Table of ContentsList of Contributors xiii 1 Materials for Polymer Nanocomposites 1Jiji Abraham, Soney C. George, Rene Muller, Nandakumar Kalarikkal, and Sabu Thomas 1.1 Introduction, 1 1.3 Recent Developments and Opportunities in the Area of Polymer Nanocomposites, 16 1.4 Challenges in the Area of Polymer Nanocomposites, 17 1.5 Relationships of Macroscopic Rheological Properties to Nanoscale Structural Variables, 18 1.6 Conclusion, 19 Acknowledgments, 20 References, 20 2 Manufacturing Polymer Nanocomposites 29Yuvaraj Haldorai and Jae-Jin Shim 2.1 Introduction, 29 2.2 Nanofillers, 30 2.3 Polymer Matrices, 36 2.4 Preparation of Nanocomposites, 37 2.5 Characterization, 58 2.6 Conclusions, 60 References, 61 3 Rheology and Processing of Polymer Nanocomposites: Theory, Practice, and New Challenges 69Jean-Charles Majesté 3.1 Introduction, 69 3.2 Viscoelasticity of Nanocomposites, 72 3.3 Flow Properties of Nanocomposites, 92 3.4 Theory and Modeling of Nanocomposites Rheology, 103 3.5 Processing of Nanocomposites, 119 3.6 Conclusion and Futures Challenges, 125 Acknowledgments, 127 References, 127 4 Mixing of Polymers Using the Elongational Flow Mixer (RMX®) 135Rigoberto Ibarra-Gómez and René Muller 4.1 Introduction, 135 4.2 Polymer Blends, 136 4.3 Polymer Nanocomposites, 147 4.4 Elongational Flow Mixer (RMX®), 151 4.5 RMX® Mixing of Polymer Blends, 158 4.6 Mixing of Polymer Nanocomposites, 173 4.7 Concluding Remarks, 182 References, 182 5 Rheology and Processing of Polymer/Layered Silicate Nanocomposites 187Masami Okamoto 5.1 Introduction, 187 5.2 Nanostructure Development, 189 5.3 Novel Compounding Methods for Delamination of OMLFs, 199 5.4 Nanostructure and Rheological Properties, 202 5.5 Nanocomposite Foams, 222 5.6 Future Prospects, 230 References, 230 6 Processing and Rheological Behaviors of CNT/Polymer Nanocomposites 235Mohan Raja, Modigunta Jeevan Kumar Reddy, Kwang Ho Won, Jae Ik Kim, Sang Hun Cha, Han Na Bae, Dae Hyeon Song, Sung Hun Ryu, and Andikkadu Masilamani Shanmugharaj 6.1 Introduction, 235 6.2 Processing Techniques of Polymer/CNT Nanocomposites, 237 6.3 Rheological Properties of Polymer/Carbon Nanotube Composites, 254 6.4 Summary, 274 Acknowledgment, 274 References, 274 7 Unusual Phase Separation in PS Rich Blends with PVME in Presence of MWNTs 279Priti Xavier and Suryasarathi Bose 7.1 Introduction, 279 7.2 Experimental Methods, 280 7.3 Theory Background, 281 7.4 Results and Discussion, 284 7.5 Conclusions, 291 Acknowledgements, 291 References, 291 8 Rheology and Processing of Polymer/POSS Nanocomposites 293Krzysztof Pielichowski, Tomasz M. Majka, and Konstantinos N. Raftopoulos 8.1 Introduction, 293 8.2 Polyhedral Oligomeric Silsesquioxanes, 296 8.3 Processing of Polymer/POSS Nanocomposites, 299 8.4 Rheological Behavior of POSS-Based Polymer Nanocomposites, 314 8.5 Conclusions, 318 Acknowledgments, 320 References, 320 9 Polymer and Composite Nanofiber: Electrospinning Parameters and Rheology Properties 329Palaniswamy Suresh Kumar, Sundaramurthy Jayaraman, and Gurdev Singh 9.1 Introduction, 329 9.2 Electrospinning, 331 9.3 Electrospinning Process Parameters, 333 9.4 Polymer-Based Nanofiber and its Rheology, 337 9.5 Nanofiber and its Polymer Composites, 348 9.6 Conclusion, 351 References, 351 10 Rheology and Processing of Inorganic Nanomaterials and Quantum Dots/Polymer Nanocomposites 355Sneha Mohan, Jiji Abraham, Oluwatobi S. Oluwafemi, Nandakumar Kalarikkal, and Sabu Thomas 10.1 Inorganic Nanoparticle Filled Polymer Nanocomposites, 356 10.2 Fabrication of Inorganic Nanoparticle Filled Polymer Nanocomposites, 356 10.3 Why Rheological Study is Important for Polymer Nanocomposites, 357 10.4 Rheology of Quantum Dot Based Polymer Nanocomposites, 359 10.5 Metal Oxide Nanoparticle-Based Polymer Nanocomposites, 366 10.6 Conclusion, 379 References, 379 11 Rheology and Processing of Laponite/Polymer Nanocomposites 383Huili Li, Wenchen Ren, Jinlong Zhu, Shimei Xu, and Jide Wang 11.1 Introduction, 383 11.2 Rheology, 384 11.3 Processing, 388 11.4 Conclusions and Outlook, 399 Acknowledgement, 400 References, 400 12 Graphene-Based Nanocomposites: Mechanical, Thermal, Electrical, and Rheological Properties 405Rachid Bouhfid, Hamid Essabir, and Abou el kacem Qaiss 12.1 Introduction, 405 12.2 Graphene, 407 12.3 The Use of Graphene in Nanocomposite Materials, 408 12.4 Nanocomposite Characterization, 412 12.5 Conclusion, 425 12.6 Future Perspective, 425 References, 426 13 Processing, Rheology, and Electrical Properties of Polymer/Nanocarbon Black Composites 431Luís C. Costa and Manuel P. Graça 13.1 Introduction, 431 13.2 Experimental, 435 13.3 Electrical Properties of Carbon Black Composites and Applications, 437 13.4 Conclusion, 447 References, 447 14 Rheology and Processing of Nanocellulose, Nanochitin, and Nanostarch/Polymer Bionanocomposites 453Carmen-Alice Teaca and Ruxanda Bodirlau14.1 Introduction, 453 14.2 Biopolymers as Nanofillers for Polymer/Nanocomposites, 455 14.3 Potential Applications of Polysaccharide Nanofillers/Polymer Nanocomposites, 478 14.4 Conclusions and Future Perspectives, 481 References, 482 15 Rheology and Processing of Nanoparticle Filled Polymer Blend Nanocomposites 491Chongwen Huang and Wei Yu 15.1 Rheology of Polymer Blends, 491 15.2 Effect of Nanoparticles on the Morphology of Polymer Blend, 509 15.3 Rheology of Nanoparticles Filled Polymer Blend, 531 15.4 Summary, 540 References, 541 16 Rheology as a Tool for Studying In Situ Polymerized Carbon Nanotube Nanocomposites 551Guo-Hua Hu, Philippe Marchal, Sandrine Hoppe, and Christian Penu 16.1 Introduction, 551 16.2 Basic Principles of Rheokinetics, 552 16.3 Rheokinetics of In Situ Polymerization of Carbon Nanotube/Monomer Systems, 560 16.4 Rheological Percolation Threshold of Carbon Nanotube-Based Nanocomposites, 567 16.5 Concluding Remarks, 581 References, 581 Index 587

    1 in stock

    £152.06

  • Healthcare Systems Engineering

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Healthcare Systems Engineering

    10 in stock

    Book SynopsisApply engineering and design principles to revitalize the healthcare delivery system Healthcare Systems Engineering is the first engineering book to cover this emerging field, offering comprehensive coverage of the healthcare system, healthcare delivery, and healthcare systems modeling.Table of ContentsAcknowledgments xi Chapter 1 The Healthcare Delivery System 1 Overview 1 1.1 Healthcare Delivery Components 2 1.2 Major Stakeholders 6 1.3 Global Issues in Health 6 1.4 Drivers for Healthcare Systems 13 Questions and Learning Activities 22 References 23 Chapter 2 Complexity and Systems in Healthcare 25 Overview 25 2.1 Taking a Systems Approach to Healthcare 25 2.2 Complex Adaptive Systems 28 Case Study 2A: Complexity in Chronic Kidney Disease 31 2.3 Systems Thinking and System Dynamics 34 Case Study 2B: Systems Thinking and Causal Loop Diagrams in CKD 40 Case Study 2C: System Dynamics and Stock Flow Diagrams in CKD 45 Questions and Learning Activities 48 References 49 Chapter 3 Patient Flow 53 Overview 53 3.1 Healthcare Settings and Clinical Workflows 53 3.2 Patient Flow through a Hospital 64 3.3 Care Transitions 71 3.4 Process Mapping 75 3.5 Queuing 78 Case Study 3: ED Crowding – A Patient Flow Solution 80 Questions and Learning Activities 83 References 83 Chapter 4 Healthcare Financing 91 Overview 91 4.1 Financing Models for Health Services 91 4.2 Compensation Models for Providers 95 4.3 Cost Allocation and Charges 97 4.4 Capital Budgeting 103 Questions and Learning Activities 107 References 108 Chapter 5 Health Data and Informatics 111 Overview 111 5.1 Healthcare Data 116 5.2 Electronic Health Records 121 5.3 Health Information Exchange 130 5.4 Publicly Reported Healthcare Data 132 Case Study 5: Health Informatics at a Hospital—A 10-Year Journey 136 Questions and Learning Activities 139 References 140 Chapter 6 Lean 141 Overview 141 6.1 Lean Philosophy and Methods 141 6.2 Drivers for Lean Healthcare Systems 143 6.3 A Toolset for Eliminating Wastes 146 6.4 Value Stream Mapping 148 6.5 A3 150 6.6 5S 157 6.7 Kanban 160 6.8 Lean Implementations 164 6.9 Lean Thinking 165 Questions and Learning Activities 166 References 166 Chapter 7 Six Sigma 169 Overview 169 7.1 Six Sigma Philosophy 169 7.2 Six Sigma Quality 170 Case Study 7A: Quantifying Complexity in Translational Research 201 Case Study 7B: Evaluating Collaboration in Translational Research 205 Case Study 7C: Resource Allocation in Translational Research 208 Questions and Learning Activities 210 References 212 Chapter 8 Reliability and Patient Safety 217 Overview 217 8.1 Human Reliability 217 8.2 Errors in Healthcare 218 8.3 Medication Errors 220 8.4 Patient Falls 222 8.5 Human Factors and Ergonomics for Patient Safety 227 Questions and Learning Activities 236 References 237 Chapter 9 Health Analytics 245 Overview 245 9.1 Data Mining 245 Case Study 9A: Predicting Parkinson’s Disease Using Data Mining 251 9.2 Data Visualization 255 Case Study 9B: Data Visualization in Obesity Counseling 269 9.3 Social Network Analysis 271 Case Study 9C: SNA in a Pediatric Intensive Care Unit (PICU) 277 9.4 Data Envelopment Analysis 280 Case Study 9D: Using DEA for Finding Best-in-Class Hospitals in a Network 285 9.5 Multicriteria Decision Making 287 Case Study 9E: Use of GP to Optimize Helicopter Emplacement at Medical Treatment Facilities 291 Questions and Learning Activities 292 References 293 Chapter 10 Capacity Management 297 Overview 297 10.1 Capacity Management Challenges 297 10.2 Managing Nursing Units 299 10.3 Managing Operating Rooms 310 10.4 Managing Diagnostic Units 316 10.5 Nurse Staffing and Scheduling 317 Questions and Learning Activities 320 References 321 Chapter 11 Healthcare Logistics 323 Overview 323 11.1 Facility Location 323 Case Study 11: Location of Federally Qualified Healthcare Centers 337 11.2 Home Healthcare Routing and Scheduling 341 Questions and Learning Activities 347 References 349 Chapter 12 Health Supply Chains 351 Overview 351 12.1 Forecasting Demand 351 12.2 Inventory Control 357 12.3 Healthcare Distribution 363 12.4 Coordinating Activities in the Supply Chain 369 Questions and Learning Activities 375 References 377 Chapter 13 Infection Control 379 Overview 379 13.1 Historical Perspective 379 13.2 Infection Control Classification 381 13.3 Checklists for Infection Control 383 13.4 The Case of Sepsis 385 13.5 Mathematical Modeling of Hospital Infection Control 388 Case Study 13: Impact of Interventions on TB Infection in a Clinic 398 Questions and Learning Activities 402 References 403 Index 405

    10 in stock

    £100.65

  • Materials Kinetics Fundamentals

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Materials Kinetics Fundamentals

    Book SynopsisIntroductory kinetics for the undergrad materials scientist Materials Kinetics Fundamentals is an accessible and interesting introduction to kinetics processes, with a focus on materials systems. Designed for the undergraduate student, this book avoids intense mathematics to present the theory and application of kinetics in a clear, reader-friendly way. Students are first introduced to the fundamental concepts of kinetics, with illustrated diagrams, examples, text boxes, and homework questions that impart a unified, intuitive understanding. Further chapters cover the application of these concepts in the context of materials science, with real-world examples including silicon processing and integrated circuit fabrication, thin-film deposition, carbon-14 dating, steel degassing, energy conversion, and more. Instructor materials including a test bank are available through the companion website, providing a complete resource for the undergraduate materials science student.Table of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgments xv Learning Objectives xvii I Kinetic Principles 1 Introduction to Materials Kinetics 3 1.1 What Is Kinetics? 3 1.2 Kinetics Versus Thermodynamics 4 1.3 Homogeneous Versus Heterogeneous Kinetics 6 1.4 Reaction Versus Diffusion 7 1.5 Classifying Kinetic Processes 9 1.6 Brief Word about Units 10 1.7 Chapter Summary 11 1.8 Chapter Exercises 12 2 A Short Detour into Thermodynamics 14 2.1 Dynamic Equilibrium 14 2.2 Enthalpy (H), Entropy (S), and Gibbs Free Energy (G) 15 2.2.1 Relationship between ΔG, ΔH, and ΔS 16 2.3 Molar Quantities 18 2.4 Standard State 19 2.5 Calculating Thermodynamic Quantities 20 2.6 Reaction Quotient Q and Equilibrium Constant K 22 2.7 Temperature Dependence of K 28 2.8 Thermodynamics of Phase Transformations 31 2.9 Ideal Gas Law 34 2.10 Calculating Concentrations for Liquids or Solids 36 2.10.1 Calculating Densities/Concentrations in Pure Materials 36 2.10.2 Calculating Densities/Concentrations in Stoichiometric Compounds or Dilute Solutions 37 2.10.3 Calculating Densities/Concentrations for Mixtures of Multiple Phases/Compounds 39 2.10.4 Calculating Densities/Concentrations from Crystallographic Information 41 2.10.5 Calculating Site Fractions 42 2.11 Chapter Summary 44 2.12 Chapter Exercises 46 3 Chemical Reaction Kinetics 48 3.1 Homogeneous versus Heterogeneous Chemical Reactions 50 3.2 Homogeneous Chemical Reactions 51 3.2.1 Reaction Rate Equation and k 51 3.2.2 Order of Reaction 51 3.2.3 Zero-Order Reactions 53 3.2.4 First-Order Reactions 54 3.2.5 Second-Order Reactions 58 3.2.6 Incomplete Reactions/Equilibrium Reactions 64 3.2.7 Summary of Homogeneous Reaction Kinetics 68 3.3 Temperature Dependence of Reaction Kinetics: Activation Theory 68 3.4 Heterogeneous Chemical Reactions 72 3.4.1 Effect of Catalyst 72 3.4.2 Gas–Solid Surface Reaction Processes 75 3.5 Chapter Summary 79 3.6 Chapter Exercises 81 4 Transport Kinetics (Diffusion) 84 4.1 Flux 85 4.2 Fluxes and Forces 87 4.3 Common Transport Modes (Force/Flux Pairs) 88 4.4 Phenomenological Treatment of Diffusion 90 4.4.1 Steady-State Diffusion: Fick’s First Law 91 4.4.2 Transient Diffusion: Fick’s Second Law 94 4.4.3 Kirkendal Effect and Moving Interface Problems 118 4.4.4 Summary of Transient Diffusion Problems 120 4.4.5 Coupled Diffusion Processes 120 4.5 Atomistic Treatment of Diffusion 125 4.5.1 Overview of Diffusion in Gases Versus Liquids Versus Solids 125 4.5.2 Diffusion in Gases: Kinetic Theory of Gases 126 4.5.3 Diffusion in Solids: Atomistic Mechanisms of Solid-State Diffusion 130 4.5.4 Diffusion in Solids: High-Diffusivity Paths 135 4.6 Chapter Summary 139 4.7 Chapter Exercises 142 II Applications of Materials Kinetics 5 Gas–Solid Kinetic Processes 151 5.1 Adsorption/Desorption 151 5.2 Active Gas Corrosion 157 5.3 Chemical Vapor Deposition 166 5.4 Atomic Layer Deposition 176 5.5 Passive Oxidation 179 5.6 Chapter Summary 184 5.7 Chapter Exercises 187 6 Liquid–Solid and Solid–Solid Phase Transformations 190 6.1 What Is a Phase Transformation? 190 6.2 Driving Forces for Transformation: Temperature and Composition 192 6.2.1 Calculating ΔGV 193 6.3 Spinodal Decomposition: A Continuous Phase Transformation 197 6.4 Surfaces and Interfaces 199 6.4.1 Estimating Surface Energies 200 6.4.2 Interfacial Energy Balances 203 6.4.3 Overview of Important Surface/Interface Energy Effects 205 6.5 Nucleation 205 6.5.1 Homogeneous Nucleation 206 6.5.2 Heterogeneous Nucleation 212 6.5.3 Nucleation Rate 218 6.6 Growth 221 6.7 Nucleation and Growth Combined 226 6.7.1 Effect of Nucleation Rate versus Growth Rate on Microstructure 226 6.7.2 Overall Rate of Transformation: Johnson–Mehl and Avrami Equations 229 6.7.3 Time–Temperature–Transformation Diagrams 230 6.8 Solidification 232 6.8.1 Casting Microstructures 233 6.8.2 Plane Front Solidification (Scheil Equation) 233 6.8.3 Cellular or Dendritic Growth 235 6.8.4 Eutectic Lamellae 237 6.8.5 Peritectic Solidification 240 6.9 Martensitic Transformations 241 6.10 Chapter Summary 242 6.11 Chapter Exercises 247 7 Microstructural Evolution 251 7.1 Capillary Forces 251 7.2 Surface Evolution 256 7.2.1 Surface Evolution by Solid-State Diffusion 256 7.2.2 Surface Evolution by Vapor-Phase Transport 257 7.3 Coarsening 258 7.3.1 Diffusion-Limited Coarsening 258 7.3.2 Source/Sink-Limited Coarsening 259 7.4 Grain Growth 261 7.5 Sintering 263 7.6 Chapter Summary 265 7.7 Chapter Exercises 268 References 270 III Appendixes A Units 273 B Periodic Table 276 C Answers to Selected Calculation Questions 278 Index 281

    £90.86

  • Fundamentals of Vehicle Dynamics and Modelling

    John Wiley & Sons Inc Fundamentals of Vehicle Dynamics and Modelling

    3 in stock

    Book SynopsisFundamentals of Vehicle Dynamics and Modeling Bruce P.Table of ContentsDedication Preface Acknowledgement List of Symbols xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Past, present, and future 2 References 4 2 Tire Modelling 5 2.1 Rolling losses 5 2.2 Longitudinal force 7 2.3 Lateral force 9 2.4 Vertical moments 11 2.5 Normal force 12 References 14 3 Longitudinal Dynamics 15 3.1 Acceleration performance 16 3.1.1 Engine limited performance 16 3.1.2 Tire limited acceleration 21 3.1.3 Grade performance 23 3.2 Braking performance 23 4 Linear Dynamic Models 31 4.1 .e yaw plane model 31 4.1.1 Steady state analysis 35 4.1.2 Transient analysis 42 4.1.3 Frequency response 48 4.1.4 Time history solution 52 4.2 .e truck and trailer model 53 4.2.1 Steady state analysis 56 4.2.2 Transient analysis 57 4.3 .e quarter car model 60 4.3.1 Transient analysis 63 4.3.2 Frequency response 68 4.4 .e bounce-pitch model 73 4.4.1 Transient analysis 75 4.4.2 Frequency response 82 References 91 5 Full Car Model 93 5.1 Steady state analysis 93 5.1.1 .e bounce-pitch-roll model 94 5.1.2 .e lateral-yaw model 97 5.2 Transient analysis 99 5.3 Kinematic effects 101 5.3.1 Roll centres 103 5.3.2 Quasi static model, with roll centres 106 5.4 Numerical solution of suspension kinematics 110 5.4.1 Algebraic equations formulation 110 5.4.2 Differential equations formulation 112 5.4.3 Tire orientation effects 114 5.5 Suspension damping 116 References 119 6 Multibody Dynamics 121 6.1 Generating the governing equations 121 6.1.1 Preliminary definitions 122 6.2 Definition of coordinates 123 6.3 Kinematic differential equations 125 6.4 Newton Euler equations 128 6.4.1 Inertial forces 129 6.4.2 Elastic forces 130 6.4.3 Linear spring 132 6.5 Constraint equations 137 6.5.1 Spherical joint 139 6.6 State space form 141 6.7 Example systems 144 6.7.1 Rigid rider bicycle 144 6.7.2 Multibody quarter car 150 References 155 7 Mathematics 157 7.1 Algebraic equations 157 7.1.1 Nonlinear algebraic equations 157 7.1.2 Linear algebraic equations 158 7.2 Differential equations 159 7.2.1 Nonlinear differential equations 160 7.2.2 Linear first order ODEs 160 7.2.3 Eigen analysis 161 7.2.4 Linear second order ODEs 164 7.2.5 Frequency response analysis 167 7.3 Differential algebraic equations 172 7.3.1 Differential equation approach 172 7.3.2 Algebraic equation approach 173 7.3.3 Linear differential algebraic equations 174 A Appendix A 177 A.1 Algebraic equations 177 A.2 Differential equations 178 Index 183

    3 in stock

    £76.90

© 2026 Book Curl

    • American Express
    • Apple Pay
    • Diners Club
    • Discover
    • Google Pay
    • Maestro
    • Mastercard
    • PayPal
    • Shop Pay
    • Union Pay
    • Visa

    Login

    Forgot your password?

    Don't have an account yet?
    Create account